LEO MARK

A Novel based on historical documents

JESUS

THE EXTRATERRESTRIAL

A Trilogy

Volume I: Origins

To follow:

Volume II: Armageddon

Volume III: The Return

Copyright © 2011 by Leo Mark

This book is a work of fiction. Names, characters, businesses, organizations, places, events,

and incidents either are the product of the author´s imagination or are used fictitiously. Any

resemblance to actual persons, living or dead, or actual events is entirely coincidental.

All Rights reserved.

Published in the United States by the author Leo Mark

leomark@JesusET.com.br – www.JesusTheExtraterrestrial.com

Editorial Direction: Marco Giroto

Translation: Anthony Addis

Cover design: Wellington Consoli

Cover image: Benjamin West (1738-1820)

Diagramming: Typodesign

Mark, Leo

Jesus, the Extraterrestrial – Volume I: Origins/by Leo Mark

First Edition

2011

AUTHOR’S NOTE

From an early age I was always full of questions. The world as I saw it wasn’t quite as people described it to me. There always seemed to be something odd about the stories they told me: they didn’t quite fit, or something was missing. But when you are a child and everyone tells you the same stories, you start to believe in them religiously; you carry them with you throughout your life, passing them on to your children and grandchildren.

A lot of my family are evangelicals (a brother of mine and an uncle are pastors of the church); and so in my childhood I studied in Adventist schools. I attended religious studies classes and most days we had to say a prayer when we arrived at school and when we left (a true brain-washing exercise).

All the children believed in those bible stories without so much as questioning them. Yet I, something of a rebel as I always was, never entirely agreed with what they were telling me, for the stories seemed to be too fantastic and too unlikely, so I was never convinced that they were really true. I had a lot of questions to ask about them all and I wouldn’t rest until my questions

were answered.

And so, as a teenager, I started studying the Bible and began to formulate theories which, when I propounded them, made people think I was crazy or blasphemous. They said my thoughts were sinful (was I to be punished, in other words, simply because I used my head for thinking, because I had opinions instead of accepting the opinions of others, because I rejected the collective truth?).

As time went by I went deeper into these matters and the research I carried out served to convince me that my theories weren’t so totally absurd or wrong, that on the contrary they were entirely correct – that the rest of the world believed in fairy tales. People were tied to their beliefs, to baseless or outdated tales. Perhaps because of the superior status of the storyteller, mankind’s own true history had become a narrative replete with obscure passages.

I read dozens of books and hundreds of articles about all this, and I watched documentaries. I began to look for answers in the Bible itself and even in the Apocrypha. In this way I discovered for myself part of the truth about the world, about where we had come from and why we are here. Naturally there are many more questions to be answered, but I am constantly searching.

Everything I studied can easily be found in books and today, more than ever, on the internet – the problem is to know which translators and authors are really dependable and which of them favor their own theories to the detriment of the written sources. I chose believable sources and I saw that it was desirable for a synthesis of the truth to be made accessible to the world at large, by means of a book written in simple language and easy-to-understand concepts, so that everyone, irrespective of age or upbringing, might learn about valuable documents which are relatively new compared to some others of historical importance.

Here, then, is the first volume of a trilogy which could shake the structure of our society and raise its readers to a new level of understanding, perhaps even to a new level of excellence. I therefore beg you, dear reader, to digest this work with an open mind, free of prejudice and free of those concepts instilled in you by religion. People need to know the truth, for otherwise there will soon come a time when mankind as we know it ceases to exist.

Leo Mark

***

RELEVANT FACT

In 1877, to the south of Babylon, in Mesopotamia (now Iraq), the Frenchman Ernest de Sarzec discovered traces of the most ancient civilization on earth, the Sumerian civilization. After his death the excavations continued and while they lasted thousands of clay tablets inscribed in cuneiform script were found. The translation of these documents revealed stories very similar to those we find in the Bible, from the creation of man to the Flood, but much richer in details.

Most of the flashbacks and travels in time which occur in this work correspond to the writings left by the first literate human beings on earth, who cohabited on a daily basis with beings known today as gods. As well as the Sumerian tablets I have also made use as references of stories contained in the Bible and in the books considered apocryphal by the Catholic Church. Some chapters or passages which have to do with more recent events are based on actual occurrences, and some of the characters are real. I have changed the names of others, however, to protect their identities.

RELIGIOUS FANATICS, THEOLOGIANS AND

PSEUDO-THEOLOGIANS PLEASE NOTE:

I ask you to read my work before expressing any criticism or opinion of it or of my person. Criticism is most welcome as long as it is well-founded, for otherwise it is not criticism but simply a personal opinion based on someone else’s thoughts; in fact, not opinion at all but just the expression of a collective “truth”, probably derived from some religious leader who also received it at second hand. I ask the theologians and pseudo-theologians not to come to me insisting that the Bible is God’s truth; remember, first of all, that the Bible is just another historical document, which has been subject to major modification during its dozens of translations. Remember too that there are other documents that bear careful study, quite apart from the best known, most widely circulated all-time bestseller. I do not claim that this work has a monopoly of the truth; I present it as a way of sharing a little of the knowledge I have acquired during more than ten years of study and research. Nor do I pretend that every word I have written is necessarily true; for after all this is a work of fiction, and it will be up to the reader to study it carefully and reach his

own conclusions.

But don’t just criticize a writer who is trying to do the right thing by demonstrating the truth, based on the research he has done and on an analysis of the facts of mankind´s history. Instead do the world a favor, not just by stopping the proliferation of meaningless and unfounded opinions, but also by reading this book carefully: it will help you not to swallow whole all the things you thought you knew and all the things you’ve been told before, which don’t even come close to the truth.

My message to accompany this first part of my trilogy about the story of mankind is the following: Think outside the box. Question the world.

PROLOGUE

Jerusalem, 34 AD

The city was all a-buzz, with everyone out in the streets to see the famous Christ go by, carrying his enormous wooden cross through the city. Not far from the narrow streets of Jerusalem, a man called Joseph, a native of Arimathaea, was heading towards Calvary, the place where Jesus was to be crucified. The sun was shining and the heat was almost unbearable; but when Joseph was least expecting it, the sky began to get overcast, the rays of the sun gave way to darkness, and from where he sat on his camel Joseph could see a great light in the sky which lit up the part of the desert where he was travelling. Little by little the light got brighter and the sands of the desert started to rise, forming a sandstorm. Then the bright light settled over the head of Joseph, and slowly an angel began to take shape. Gradually the sand started to settle. Joseph started slapping his own face, sure that he was dreaming: he had never in his life seen anything so beautiful and so magnificent. It was then that the angel, clothed in gold and silver robes, put his feet on the desert sand. Joseph´s camel was perfectly calm; Joseph was trembling and frightened. He slipped off the camel to take shelter, and as his feet touched the sand a voice rang out:

‘Be not afraid, Joseph. I am the messenger of the Lord. He has a most important task for you.’

‘I cannot believe my eyes! Are you real?’ asked Joseph, falling on his knees on the hot sand.

‘As you can well see, I am not a figment of your imagination!’

‘I am at the Lord´s command. Whatever you ask I shall do without delay.’

‘Joseph, take good heed of my words. Take this flask and fill it with the blood of Jesus. As soon as the blood is in it, close it and it will seal itself. Hide the flask and protect it with your life. After Jesus is risen, take Mary Magdalene with you and flee to Marseilles, for you will need to flee - she carries in her womb the seed of Jesus. This flask must remain with the descendants of the true blood of Jesus until he is born again, which will come to pass through the blood which you shall save. When the proper time is nigh, the flask will emit a sound, and then only a descendant of Jesus will have the power to open it, and only a woman of the blood of Jesus will be able to carry the Master in her womb and give new birth to him; for this reason it is all-important that the flask remains with the descendants of Christ. So the destiny of humankind is in your hands.’

The angel gave Joseph a golden cylinder with silver workings and some small inscriptions, about four inches long and a little over one inch in circumference. One end was rounded and open, ready for the blood of Christ. The angel spoke again:

‘Go, fetch the blood of Jesus and guard his body for three days so that it shall not be desecrated. On the third day, flee from Jerusalem with Mary Magdalene, for men will seek you out.’

The angel began to rise up again towards the light, and the sand of the desert began to blow in circles, forming a whirlwind around Joseph. In a few seconds the light began to go up, and up, until it became just one more star in the sky.

Joseph still couldn´t believe that an angel had spoken to him and entrusted the fate of humanity to him. When he came to himself, he urged the camel on to carry him as fast as it could. He galloped over the desert sands. When he reached Calvary, where Jesus was being crucified, he was amazed at the great crowd of people surrounding him, and from a distance he saw the bloody body of Jesus nailed to a wooden cross. At the foot of the cross, Jesus’ mother and Mary Magdalene were weeping and crying out for the life of Christ. Joseph got nearer and started pushing his way through the crowd, to get close to Jesus. He was carrying the chalice that Jesus had used at the Last Supper. As he got closer he could see Jesus better, and he could not believe that so much violence had been done to a holy man, the son of God; and he wondered why God had allowed this to happen, and whether there was some purpose in it.

Jesus’ body no longer moved. After a few minutes a centurion of the Roman guard took a lance and stuck it into his side, leaving a gash between his ribs, to make sure that he was dead. The blood spurted and began to run out of the wound. Some blood splashed on the face of the centurion, who had problems with his sight, and he fell to his knees on the ground, feeling that his eyes were burning. When he finished wiping his eyes he found that his sight was no longer clouded. A strong feeling of guilt overwhelmed the centurion, who stayed on the ground and started weeping with remorse for what he had done to Jesus. It was a miracle. While Joseph of Arimethaea was watching the scene of the repentant centurion, he raised the chalice used by Jesus at the supper, pressed it against Jesus’ leg and collected the blood that was running down his body. Seconds later the sky filled with darkness, great black clouds began to form, an earthquake shook the ground. In desperation the people threw themselves to the earth. A brilliant light shone through the clouds and lit up the body of the dead Christ. The sky began to hurl down thunderbolts and great flashes of lightning, the earth under Jerusalem began to shake even more violently, and the people began to cry out and run around. Many of the people who had been calling for Jesus’ death now repented, for they saw what Jesus did and that he was truly the Messiah.

After a time the earth stopped shaking. Joseph took the blood of Jesus and poured it into the flask the angel had given him. The blood started running over Joseph´s hands. But little by little he managed to fill the flask. He pressed the end to close the mouth of the flask, and it gave out a bright green light and made a sound. The cylinder with the blood of Jesus was sealed. Joseph put it inside the chalice, which he placed in a bag tied around his waist. He took Mary and Mary Magdalene by the arm and they made their way from that place, before the ground which the earthquake had opened should swallow them up. As they got further away, the clouds and the light in the sky slowly disappeared. Now there was no one left, apart from some soldiers lying on the ground, terrified at what they had witnessed. The multitude had gone, the sky began to lighten and the sun came out again.

Once Joseph had left the women in a safe place, he went towards Pilate’s palace. Joseph was a noble and influential merchant from Brittany, and he was well regarded by the noblemen in the province of Judaea. When he got to the palace he asked for an audience with Pilate, which was granted.

‘My Lord, Jesus is dead. I ask you to release the body to me so that we can prepare a fitting funeral.’

‘Joseph of Arimathaea, I release the body of your king. Go and take it up before the robbers take it or the crows devour it. Take two of my men with you to protect you while you prepare everything. I trust that God will recognize my kindness and goodwill.’

‘Thank you, my Lord.’

Joseph went to the hiding-place where he had left Mary and Mary Magdalene, as well as some of the disciples. When he got there he spoke to the group:

‘Pilate has allowed me to take the body of Jesus, so that we can give it a proper funeral. We will place it in a tomb which belongs to my family. We must protect it until the day of resurrection. Pilate has given us two guards to watch the entrance to the tomb and to make sure that no one steals the body. Mary said:

‘God bless you, Joseph, for what you are doing for my son.’

But Joseph addressed himself to the other woman:

‘Mary Magdalene, I need a minute with you alone, I must speak with you.’

‘Tell me, sir,’ she answered, as she and Joseph moved a short distance away from the house where they were.

‘When Jesus has risen again, get together a few people that you trust and then we will go to Gaul. An angel of the Lord told me that we must protect the seed of Jesus which is growing in your womb. We will be pursued.’

‘In my womb? I am with child by Jesus? How wonderful! Are you sure, Joseph?’ replied Mary Magdalene, confused at the news, putting her hands on her stomach.

‘There is no doubt: the angel himself told me quite clearly. When we reach Gaul I will reveal another thing to you, something much more important even than the fact that you are with child. But we shall have to speak calmly. Now let us go and take Jesus from that terrible place.’

Joseph, the women and some more of the disciples went again to Calvary. They gently took the body down from the cross and laid it on a white shroud. They made for the tomb where Jesus would be laid. When they got there they washed the body and the wounds, and wrapped it in a new shroud. They prayed to God to protect his Son, then they left the tomb and with the help of the guards they dragged up a great round stone to close the entrance to the tomb. The soldiers remained on guard and the others went to a hiding-place nearby. After three days, in the early morning, a light arose in the sky. The trees around the tomb began to shake violently. The guards, who were sleeping, awoke terrified of the light that was coming towards them. And then an angel appeared out of the bright light and settled on a rock that was part of the tomb where Jesus lay. The guards were amazed at the sight and began to run and to hide; but they could not run properly because of the bright lights and the strong winds, and they fell to the ground. Mary and Mary Magdalene were approaching the sepulcher when they caught sight of the angel, which saw them coming and said:

‘Be not afraid. I know that you have come for Jesus who lately was crucified. But he is no more here. He has risen again, as he foretold to you. Enter and see the place where the Lord was lying.’

The two women went into the tomb and saw that there was no one. The body was no longer there, just some pieces of cloth stained with blood, thrown on the floor. And then the angel spoke to them again:

‘Go now and give the news to the disciples of Jesus. Tell them that the Christ has risen again. He will meet them in Galilee.’

The two of them ran to where the disciples were. Their hearts were heavy, because Jesus would leave them again, but at the same time they were full of joy knowing that he had returned. When they were approaching the house where the disciples were hidden, Jesus came out from behind a great tree and appeared miraculously to them. They both fell at his feet.

Jesus said to Mary:

‘Woman, be not afraid. Get my disciples together and they will meet me in Galilee.’

‘Jesus! Thank God that you are alive!’ exclaimed his mother.

‘I always was alive, woman. Did I not tell you that I would return on the third day? Did you not believe my word?’

‘Of course we did. But only after all that we witnessed.’

‘Jesus, an angel appeared to Joseph and told him that I am expecting a child of yours,’ said Mary Magdalene.

‘Yes, it will be a girl. Take good care of her.’

‘But now that you are alive, why will you not go with us?’

‘I cannot, woman. My father needs me. But I will return soon, do not fear. Now go, and take the news to the others.’

All of them set off for Galilee and there they met Jesus, who gave the disciples his last instructions. Some time later, at nightfall, a great wind arose and grew ever stronger. Dust mingled with sticks and leaves was lifted into the air and blew around the place where they were. Then a great light appeared in the sky, and from the light there came angels of God. Jesus stayed where he was, unmoving. The others, afraid at what was happening, began to draw away little by little. Moments later, the light settled over the body of Jesus, which began to float and to be slowly lifted up towards the centre of the light. As he went up, now Jesus looked upwards and now he looked down at his disciples, who were looking up at him, frightened and amazed. Soon Jesus disappeared in the midst of the light and the angels, who were forming a sort of celestial escort, began to fly into the centre of the light, one by one. The light dimmed and the wind began to drop. The light disappeared into the horizon and turned into one more star in the sky. All those that were present on the hillside began to weep and to speak of the ascension of Jesus.

‘I hope he will come back one day,’ thought Mary Magdalene, putting her hands on her stomach.

The next day, Joseph of Arimathaea spoke to Mary Magdalene:

‘Pack your bags, take only the essentials, and call on the people you trust. We shall leave at once.’

The group of travelers consisted of Mary of Cleopas, Martha Lazarus, Estropius, Sidonius, Sara the black woman, Mary Magdalene and Joseph of Arimathaea. They all set off for Gaul, and when they arrived they were received by Philip.

On the night they arrived, Joseph went to talk to Mary Magdalene.

‘Lady, mark well my words. The same angel who told me that you are with child asked me to keep the blood of Jesus. He told me that Jesus would be born again on earth by means of this blood that I have kept; however only his descendants will be able to open the flask that contains the blessed blood. You must tell this story to the daughter of Jesus, and she will pass it on to her children, and so on down the generations, until the moment of rebirth arrives. When the moment comes, this sacred flask will emit a sound. When the sound is heard, it will mean the time has come. I have made a hole in this wooden chalice which Jesus used at the Last Supper and I have hidden the cylinder in the stem. If we lose the chalice no one will know what is really kept in it. As far as anyone else is concerned, it will simply be the chalice in which I collected the blood of the King at his death. I will stay close to protect you and your descendants, and my descendants will do the same until the time comes; for the angel said that Jesus will be reborn through this blood, and that he shall be carried in the womb of a woman of his lineage.’

‘Joseph, I thank you for what you are doing for me, for Jesus and for our daughter. May your name and your deeds be remembered for all eternity.’

‘It is I who must thank you, for giving me this great and divine honor.’

Time passed. The day of the birth of Jesus’ daughter arrived. On a night full of stars, Mary Magdalene gave birth to a baby girl and gave her the name of Sarah. High above the house where the baby was born, brightly colored lights shone. God´s angels were there to make sure that the daughter of Jesus should be born in perfect safety.

CHAPTER 1

New York, September 2001

David woke at 6 a.m. as he did every morning. He took a bath, brushed his teeth, put on his school clothes, grabbed his satchel. As he left his room he could see through the half-open door of his parents´ bedroom that they were still asleep, as usual. He tip-toed down the stairs, so as not to wake them. He made breakfast for all the family. On the table he put jam, toast, honey, cheese, fruit, juice, milk and coffee. David loved breakfast time: it was the only time of the day he could be with his parents, who worked all day long and had little time to spare for their only child. Only ten years old, he did everything, every morning. When his parents woke and came down, the breakfast table was ready and there was that special smell of coffee in the air. The family took breakfast together, chatting about the matters of the day - school, friends, politics, science, computers and other adult stuff, but David adored it. He seemed to understand a lot about these things, more than most adults. It was that special time in the morning when they ate, talked, laughed, made plans.

Round about half seven David picked up his satchel and set off to work with his parents. For the last two years, every day, he had been “working” with them. Sarah didn´t like leaving their only son alone in the big, dangerous city of New York.

The three of them set off walking to where Sarah and Richard worked - in the same company, in adjoining buildings. David spent part of the time in his father´s building, part of the time in his mother´s. Sarah was the financial director of the company and Richard the manager of the department of technology. Both of them were paid very well, having been hired at about the same time and for salaries well above the average. What´s more, there was a special area reserved for the children of the staff. However this was the last year but one that David would be going to where his parents worked, because when he was eleven he would no longer be able to stay there. But until that age, the children could study various courses, learn languages, and surf the internet, all under the eye of their parents by means of strategically located cameras. Both the buildings possessed one of these areas, on the same floor. As David had made friends in both buildings he took turns to spend time in each one. At midday everyone had lunch.

At one p.m. David went to school, which was a few blocks away. The mother of one of the children, the wife of one of the staff, took him and her son to the school. But that morning, long before it was time for lunch or for them to go to school, something very unusual happened. While David was chatting with his friends, at 8.46 a.m., they heard, they saw, they felt a huge explosion. The noise was deafening. The heat that overtook them was unbearable. The ceiling began to cave in, and they heard shouts and screams from all directions. The lights had simply gone out. Everything turned dark, hot and noisy. The explosion had been felt in the upper floors, but the heat was very close. Bits of the ceiling began to collapse.

In the confusion, Sarah ran towards where David was. The corridor was only about 30 yards long; but, through the window, David could see his mother desperately trying to push her way through the throng, running along the wing of the building to get to him. Suddenly, because of the thick smoke that was filling the building, David could no longer see his mother. The ceiling started falling on to the people below, many of them were sheltering under tables, many were running, and the flames from the upper floors started to invade their floor of the building. David was paralyzed at the sight, unable to move, simply watching the scene of terror. He began to worry about his mother, gathered his courage and began to run towards where he had last seen her. People were pushing each other, climbing over each other to try and get through the door that led to the fire escape. Crawling between the legs of panic-stricken people, David managed to get to the office where he could find his mother. In the darkness, crying in desperation, he started to scratch through the rubble, looking for her. He began to shout her name, but without success.

‘Muuummyyyy!!! Where are you???’

His cries were unheard among so many other desperate cries.

When his strength ran out he fell to his knees on the floor, in tears and in despair.

‘Mummy, help!! Please, don´t leave me here alone,’ he called out in a weak voice.

When he was almost giving up, he caught sight of his mother´s red hair under a beam which could easily have weighed a ton or more. He got closer and saw that her face was covered with blood. It looked as if she was dead.

‘Mummy, please, don´t die,’ the boy repeated despairingly, trying to awaken her.

David got up and looked around him. He began to see several bodies on the floor and a lot of blood everywhere (what he was seeing there was something that even the bloodiest films didn´t show). He couldn´t believe what he was seeing. At the sight he began to go into shock. Smoke was everywhere. He could hardly breathe. The fire was beginning to spread from the upper floors. People were jumping from the upper floors and smashing into the ground. David, now lying down and practically unconscious from the smoke he had inhaled, decided to make one more effort and tried to drag his mother from under the debris.

‘Come on, Mummy, try! Try! Please don´t leave me now.’

Hardly had David stopped speaking when a huge piece of flaming concrete fell on to his back, crushing his ribs and his legs. David went out like a light. Darkness and silence reigned.

CHAPTER 2

Berne, Switzerland, April 1999

It was past two o´clock in the morning when several big luxury cars drove through the gates of one of the largest mansions in the Swiss capital. The mansion belonged to one of the most important bankers in the world, Benjamin Uggae, a leader of the secret society which called itself The Illuminati. He was an elderly man, looking to be around seventy-five years old, thin but broad-shouldered, balding and with a perfectly trimmed goatee beard. More than twenty heavily armed security guards escorted the cars, in addition to those guarding the door to the mansion. A total of eight cars drove in through the gates, which were sealed after the last one had passed. As the cars parked, men wearing black tunics with hoods got out and went up the huge marble staircase which led to the main reception room of the mansion. At the side of the stairs, two statues of winged lions in copper observed the guests passing. They were going to a meeting of the leaders of the Illuminati – a secret society created centuries earlier which aimed at dominating and ruling the world. Consisting of hundreds of members scattered throughout the world, its leadership was made up of just thirteen men, members of thirteen families which controlled nearly eighty percent of the world’s wealth. Among them were bankers, media magnates and oil moguls, a Saudi prince and members of other royal families.

These thirteen men were also members of the Bilderberg Club, made up of the most powerful people in the world, aiming to dictate the global rules, and whose main focus was the creation of a single government to rule the world: the same objective as the Illuminati, who had formed the Club. However not all members of the Club knew for sure what the Illuminati´s intentions were. In contrast to the Illuminati, a secret society which left few traces of its existence or even of who its members were, the Bilderberg Club, though closed and with membership available only to the global elite, made no effort to hide its existence. All the meetings, however, generally once a year, were behind closed doors. Always after a meeting of the Club, there was an important development somewhere in the world. Wars, alliances, presidents deposed, presidential candidates announced: in other words, the political future of the world was decided within the Club. The meeting places were secret and were revealed to the members only a few hours before meetings took place. And it was a mysterious fact that none of the great international newspaper or television networks reported these meetings which were attended by the principal political and business leaders of the world (only the independent media issued any reports about them).

In the entrance hall the men greeted each other with kisses and embraces, while a camera focused on their faces to guarantee that there was no uninvited guest. Neither personal security guards nor the house guards were allowed to enter. Wine was offered to the guests. After a few minutes’ wait, a great wooden door, set between two staircases, was opened and all of them started moving towards it. After the last eminent visitor had passed through, the door was closed. Inside, thirteen comfortable armchairs formed a circle in a room with walls of stone, dozens of works of art by famous painters, like Da Vinci and Caravaggio, and burning torches hanging on thirteen columns of marble.

When they were all sitting down, they lowered their hoods so that their faces could be seen more clearly. At one end of the circle, in an armchair a little bigger than the others, sat the grand master of the brotherhood, their host Benjamin Uggae, who was the first to speak:

‘Good evening brothers, I am grateful to you all for making the effort to be here on this momentous occasion. This extraordinary meeting has just one matter to discuss, currently the most important matter of all, which has been of concern to us for several years now. We need a plan to take the life of that damned clone, or our god Enlil will be angry with us. All of us know that we owe our lives and our fortunes to him. I would like to know if anyone has a suggestion for what we can do. Brother Arnold, please put our brothers in the picture as to what is happening in America.’

‘Brothers, our men have been following the Griffin family for years without being able to get close. The boy David is protected by soldiers of Enki and by members of the Priorate of Sian. We have lost more than five of our best men, who were uncovered by them. And even if we were able to get close enough, only a great disaster can kill the boy. It would need to be an explosion or something of the sort; bullets, or other ways of killing, he will easily survive.’

‘Brothers, I have an idea,’ said one of the others eagerly.

‘Speak, brother, any idea is welcome,’ answered the grand master.

‘You remember last year when I told you about a plan that Al Qaeda was working on to attack the United States?’

All of them nodded. The plan of attack on the Twin Towers had been thought up by Al Qaeda, but would only be given the go-ahead with the agreement of the leadership of the Illuminati, since the terrorist leader Osama Bin Laden was a member high up in the organization, although not one of the thirteen leaders. The attack had been given the leadership´s blessing, since they knew that the USA would go to war with Afghanistan, and many of them would profit from it, in arms, oil, shares and so on.

‘Then you will know that one of the main targets of the attack will be the Twin Towers, the World Trade Center.’

‘But how can that help us? How can we make the boy go into the WTC on the day and at the very time of the attacks?’ asked one of the members.

‘Some of us own companies which control other companies which have subsidiaries or even head offices in these buildings. My plan is to hire the parents of the boy to work in one of these companies. If the company doesn’t have a space for children we will arrange for it to create one and to encourage the parents to take their children. The attack will be unexpected and there will be no way they can protect him.’

‘Great idea, brother Abdul!’ exclaimed the grand master. ‘This plan really could work. In the meantime, of course, we have to rely on a bit of luck for the parents to accept jobs in one of

these companies.’

‘Brother, all it needs is a high salary to send these Americans crazy. They like money more than we do!’ said one of the members, and all of them chuckled.

‘Very well, is anyone opposed to brother Abdul’s idea?’

There was silence in the room and no one raised his hand.

‘Which of you have companies in those buildings?’

Three members raised their hands.

‘My company controls an oil distribution business with an office in the East Tower,’ said one of them.

‘My investment group controls a technological startup, with several offices in each of the towers,’ said another.

‘Perfect, brother, with a single company working in both buildings we can put the father in one tower and the mother in the other. As the attacks will be on both towers, there’s a good chance the boy will be in one of them,’ said the grand master, enthusiastic with the idea.

‘Agreed! So we have two years ahead of us to plan everything. Brother, when you get home, arrange to hire the boy’s parents, make an offer they can´t refuse, and also do whatever’s necessary to set up an area for the children of the staff, with lessons, computers, games - everything that will attract the children of today, because we have to be certain that the parents will take the boy to their place of work every day.’

‘Leave it with me, I´ll make all the arrangements this week.’

‘Brother Abdul, how is the plan going in the USA? Will the attacks in fact be carried out by planes?’

‘Yes, it’s the easiest way. Al Qaeda already has people infiltrated in the country who are having flying lessons. They will hijack several planes and crash them into the Pentagon, the White House and the World Trade Center at the same time. It will be a historic day.’

‘Indeed it will be historic. But nothing like the last great World War. We were able to make the war happen, but unfortunately we did not win it, or rather, our plan didn´t work out. I hope this plan is a success.’

‘But it is being much more carefully planned and in addition we can count on the element of surprise.’

‘I can´t wait for the day to come! Brother, that’s it, I think we are done for today. Any problem, let me know. In the meantime we’ll go on working on a contingency plan, in case this one doesn’t work out as we hope. Thank you all for coming.’

As he spoke the Grand Master stretched out his hand, raising the forefinger and little finger.

‘Hail Enlil!’ he cried as he got up, and the others replied in unison:

‘HAIL ENLIL!’

CHAPTER 3

Saudi Arabia, June 1999

The governor of Texas was climbing the stairs of the royal family’s enormous palace, escorted by two soldiers and looking around him in awe at the beauty and richness of the building. At the top of the huge staircase he was met by a beautiful woman with Indian features, covered with jewels and wearing a lovely golden sari. She greeted him and led him into a room which was at the back of a great corridor, lined with pictures and shining objects. Two soldiers were guarding the door to the room. A slight gesture from the woman was enough for them to open the door, letting them both in; and as they entered the hall they were aware of the door closing behind them. A few yards in front of him the governor could see some people, three members of the royal family and another three men in ties, who he did not know. The governor made his way to the table. He was sweating not just because of the heat but because he was nervous, having been invited to the meeting by one of the leaders of the Skull & Bones, a secret society that he had belonged to since he was at Yale, and which represented the Illuminati in the USA. In addition he was going to meet the two main leaders of the Illuminati and members of the Saudi royal family. He had had to cancel various engagements and fly at once to Saudi Arabia. The call had been very emphatic, and as he had known since his time at Yale, for him and for most of the members the organization was above the law; without the brothers’ help he would not have got to where he was.

As he got closer, one of the men with ties got up to greet the governor.

‘Mr. governor, you are very welcome, I hope you had a good journey,’ said the man, in a cheerful and educated tone, extending his hand to the governor.

‘A very long trip, but it went well, thank you for asking.’

‘My name is Arnold Idimmu, you have probably heard of me.’

‘Yes indeed, I have an account with your bank, as does my father.’

‘Yes, your father and I are good friends. But let me introduce the others. You already know his Royal Highness. This is Benjamin Uggae and this is Frederick Cullen,’ said Arnold, indicating the two men seated at his side.

The governor shook hands with all of them.

‘Please, take this chair. What would you like to drink?’

‘A coffee would be fine, thanks.’

Hardly had he ordered the coffee when he heard the door of the chamber open. He looked round to see who was coming in and could see the outline of his father walking towards the meeting table.

‘Our missing guest has arrived,’ said Arnold, extending his hand to the governor’s father, who greeted the leader and rested his hand on his son´s shoulder.

‘Dad, what are you doing here? You didn´t tell me you’d be at this meeting too.’

‘Good morning, son. It was deliberate, no one must know that we’re together at a meeting,’ he replied, while shaking hands with the others. ‘A coffee for me, too, please. Thank you,’ said the governor’s father to one of the palace servants.

‘Well, now we’re all here, let’s start the meeting,’ announced Arnold who was in the chair. Benjamin was the first to speak.

‘Your father has told us that you intend to stand for the presidency. We would like to know if you are truly determined and ready to do this.’

‘Of course, I´m totally determined. I very much want to be president and I know I am capable of running the country.’

‘Very well, we called you here because we want to finance your campaign. You are well aware that generally the candidate who spends most on his campaign is the one who wins.’

‘Yes, that’s what happens. I´m honored that you want to back me.’

‘You know too that you are a member of a lower order, and that when you became a member you promised to obey its precepts and its laws, putting them above all others.’

‘Of course. That´s how I have always acted since then. I have always done all I can to help the order and our brothers.’

‘We are pleased with your loyalty,’ said Benjamin. Arnold then spoke again.

‘Mr. Governor, our brother Benjamin, as well as one of the most important bankers in Europe, is the major shareholder in Shield Corporation, the biggest arms manufacturer in the world, with some contracts in your country. Probably you didn´t know this. As Benjamin is also a banker we don´t like to have his name mixed up with the arms industry.’

‘I know Shield very well. You make the best armaments in the world,’ answered the governor.

‘And you know too that your family holds large blocks of shares in oil companies, as do our dear brothers of the royal family?’

‘Of course I know, I just don´t know what you´re trying to get at,’ replied the governor, curious to know the reason for so many questions and preparations.

‘Please, let’s cut straight to the chase.’ This time is was his father speaking.

‘Son, what we’re trying to say is that, as they are going to finance your campaign, they will need a return on their investment, which will also benefit our family enormously.’

‘That´s right. We are businessmen and we invest our money where we know we will get a return,’ said Benjamin, putting his teacup down on the huge table.

‘What we want from you, as soon as you are elected, is that you sign purchase and arms development contracts with Shield.’

‘Naturally I understand, I had imagined this would be the case. But where does oil come into the story?’

‘We have a plan that will make America buy arms on a big scale, and in return the country and also your family will have access to a lot of oil.’

‘And what would this plan be?’

‘As soon as you take over as president, you will declare war on terrorism. First you will attack Afghanistan and then Iraq. The attack on Afghanistan will simply be a pretext for attacking Iraq. In this way the USA will take control of Iraq´s petroleum and sell drilling concessions to the companies your family has shares in, which are controlled by our dear friends of the royal family here.’

‘I´m sorry, I didn´t quite get that. You want me to attack two countries for no good reason, and send thousands of Americans to a war to die? Based on what?’

‘As I said: war on terrorism. In the year you take over as president terrorists with ties to our organization will attack the USA. The targets will be the White House, the Pentagon and the World Trade Center.’

‘Impossible, you´re telling me that terrorists are going to attack my country? And just how do they propose to do that? Our military defense is solid; nothing can get close without we know it. And car bombs or suicide bombers can´t do enough damage to justify a war.’

‘We have thought of this too. The plan is to attack the targets with civilian planes. The terrorists will hijack several commercial planes, take control of them and crash them into the chosen targets. It will be a simultaneous attack, all the planes at practically the same time.’

‘My God, a suicide attack of this size? I don´t know what to say!’ exclaimed the governor, stammering and sweating even more.

‘There´s not much you´ll have to do. Just hinder some CIA investigations.’

‘Hinder how?’

‘We´ll be using some Saudi Arabian terrorists who belong to Al Qaeda, which I´m sure you know.’

‘I know them very well: Osama Bin Laden.’

‘Exactly. We are going to finance the terrorist mission. And when it happens, you will declare war on Afghanistan, with the excuse that you are hunting Bin Laden. A couple of years later you will attack Iraq, saying that it is hiding Osama Bin Laden and that the CIA has discovered that the country is making weapons of mass destruction. In this way America will be at war with Iraq.’

‘But what if other countries intervene on behalf of Afghanistan or Iraq?’

‘If that happens, better still, more countries for us to conquer and more arms for us to sell. But it´ll be hard for a country to go to war with the greatest world power, only if they´re crazy.’

‘But don´t you think the plan is very risky?’

‘Mr. Governor, we have everything planned. It can´t go wrong.’

‘Son, look on the bright side. We´ll be toppling a dictator and bringing peace to a country controlled by terrorists, which is Afghanistan´s case. When the American citizens realize that they´ve been attacked in their own homes, they´ll be the first to demand a war against terror.’

‘OK, I agree. We shall be sacrificing a few for the security of the many, and our nation will become even stronger. But I can´t close all the armaments contracts with Shield, people will suspect something.’

‘Of course you can´t. Let´s say you give Shield 80% of the contracts, and the rest to the others,’ replied Benjamin, with a big smile.

‘Very good, son, a wise decision,’ said the senior Bush, putting his hand on his son´s shoulder.

‘The attack is planned for 11th September 2001. When you take office, give the CIA orders to wind down the investigations into Al Qaeda in US territory, and tell them to concentrate on other terrorists,’ said Frederick who had not spoken before.

Frederick Cullen was Benjamin´s right-hand man, apart from being a great military strategist and responsible for the Illuminati´s dirty work.

‘You will receive encrypted instructions via this e-mail. Here is the address and the password for you to access it once a month. When you do so, read the message and delete it immediately,’ said Frederick, handing the governor an envelope.

‘Gentlemen, I think our meeting has been very productive. Thank you all for coming and I shall count on you all to do your best,’ said Benjamin, getting up. ‘And we are grateful to the royal family for giving us the chance to work together once more. I´ll expect you at my house to take tea.’

Benjamin shook hands with their royal hosts and bowed slightly to them, an unusual enough thing as he was more accustomed to have others bow to him.

Then they all got up and walked to the palace exit. At the bottom of the staircase white limousines were waiting to take each of them to his destination. Father and son got into the same car, as they were staying at the same hotel. The son was very nervous, never having been involved in such a vast scheme before, and feeling the weight of responsibility on

his shoulders.

‘Relax, son, great power requires great responsibility. You´ll quickly get used to the taste of power and see that what we are doing is for everyone´s well-being. I very much hope you´ll keep you word when you are elected. If you don´t …’

‘But father, what if I´m not elected? And if I am, and something goes wrong, can they put the blame on me?’

‘Not if you do your part. If you do everything you´ve been told they can´t blame you if something goes wrong. What I´m afraid of is that you might not fulfill your part of the deal when the terrorist attacks take place. They are very powerful, son, do whatever is in your power, our family will profit and your name will be remembered as the one who fought terrorism and banished it from America. The last president who refused to follow the Illuminati´s instructions ended up dead. You know his name: John Fitzgerald Kennedy.’

CHAPTER 4

City of Biot, France, 1980

It was past one o´clock in the morning. More than half-a-dozen black cars were scattered around the narrow streets of the city near the little church of Saint Mary Magdalene. All the cars had smoked-glass windows, making it impossible to see who or what was inside. In the cars were men wearing smart black suits and armed to the teeth with a variety of weapons. They were there to protect a secret meeting which was going to start in a few minutes inside the church. Everyone in the city was asleep and every movement was careful and silent, so that the people living nearby shouldn´t notice their presence. Two guards watched the inside of the church, controlling the entrance of the members of the group by the back door. Every five minutes a car drew up at this door and a person wearing a monk´s habit got out. They went to the door and knocked three times at the top and twice at the bottom. It was the sign for the guard to allow them to go in. As they entered the car drove away. In all, eleven monks entered

the church.

Inside, the monks began to sit down as they arrived. The place was dark and gloomy and there were torches burning on all the columns which supported the roof of the church. The monks didn´t even look at each other, let alone exchange a word. It was totally silent. And then a monk wearing a white habit appeared at the altar.

‘Good evening, brothers,’ said the white monk in accented French. ‘I appreciate your illustrious presence. Brothers, as you well know, today is a very important day for us. For centuries our predecessors waited, and now we have been waiting for this day. Our last meeting was thirty years ago and, for some of us, this is the first meeting. As you were told, this meeting was to be in the exact place where our relic is buried - and today is the day that we will unearth it.’

The relic they were to unearth had been placed in that church by the Knights Templar in the fifteenth century, and had been lying there in secret until then. Only the family of the grand master, the white monk, knew its exact location. Weeks before the meeting, all the members had received an ancient parchment, delivered personally by trusted messengers of the grand master, informing them. The parchment was sealed with the symbol of the society, which only the members themselves recognized.

Then the white monk went on:

‘Brothers, it happens that our enemies are close to finding this place. So the withdrawal of the relic is more than providential.’

‘Brother, we would like to have the latest news about our enemies. How did you discover that they were close?’ asked one of the monks in a worried voice.

‘Our contact in the CIA is monitoring some of their members, and according to the intelligence report they are already in Marseilles, searching. They have never been so close,’ replied the grand master. ‘Please follow me down under the church. Come this way.’

The white monk climbed down and walked along the wall behind the altar. In the middle were old wooden bookshelves, practically rotten from the damp in the place. With the help of two of the other monks one of the bookshelves was carefully removed. The floor was of white marble, but it was black from years of accumulated dirt. A guard wearing a dark blue tunic took hold of a pickaxe and looked into the white monk´s eyes. The latter gave the signal for him to start breaking the marble in that exact spot. As the guard broke the flooring, instead of the broken pieces of marble staying put or flying into the air, they were sucked downwards. The floor was hollow, in fact it was a passageway. After making a hole about a yard in each direction, they could see iron bars attached to the wall, forming a staircase. The first to go down was the guard. He descended the iron steps carefully, holding a lantern in one hand. When he had gone down about ten feet he stepped on to what turned out to be a wooden trapdoor. He shone the torch on it and saw that it was locked with an enormous black padlock. As the wood seemed old and rotten, the guard raised his head and with a look asked for permission from the white monk to open the trapdoor. Permission was immediately given; and the guard, with a single kick, broke through the wood. The way was clear. He went down another six feet until he could stand on the floor. He shone the lantern round and then began to clear the cobwebs which covered everything.

It was an empty chamber, the walls were made of stone and nothing could be seen except some ancient torches hanging on the wall. One by one the monks climbed down to the chamber, now fully lit by their lanterns. The white monk indicated the exact spot on the wall that the guard should break. The man set to work at once. Some pieces of stone started to fall outwards, but most of them inwards - once again, the place was hollow. With a great effort the guard managed to clear a passage about six feet wide and four high. The guard was the first to make his way through and behind him went the monks with their lanterns lit. They passed along a corridor about eight feet wide, all of stone, for a distance of about fifty yards. The floor sloped down, so that as they walked forwards they gradually went lower. After the fifty yards they found a bend in the passage, and when they went round it the floor started to fall even more steeply. They went on for another hundred yards or so.

Suddenly they came to a huge iron gateway. This time the pickaxe wasn´t enough to break down the gate, and mere kicks were of no use. Then the white monk produced from his neck a piece of string, with two keys attached to it: one of them should open the gate. They were almost identical and the first one that the monk tried was unsuccessful. The second key fitted perfectly and he turned the lock, opening it. The guard pushed the gate but it was very heavy and the first time he failed to open it. He rested a little, and then with a slightly greater effort he pushed it open. Cautiously he entered the place, keeping his lantern in front of him to avoid any nasty surprises. Once again they found an empty chamber, this one a little smaller than the last. The white monk seemed unsurprised and the others, although surprised, were getting used to it.

‘Where should I break now, sir?’ asked the guard, who now seemed a little disheartened.

‘You don´t need to break any more, just let me past,’ said the grand master, moving ahead of him.

He could see, just above his head on one of the walls, some slightly darker stones. He reached up to touch the topmost of them and gave it a push with his two hands. The stone moved and began to slip into the wall. Noises could be heard as of a gearing mechanism working. The noise stopped and the wall slowly began to move. All of them in the chamber just stared with their mouths open.

‘John, you are to guard the entrance. We will go on alone. Many thanks for your help,’ said the white monk, putting his hand on the guard´s shoulder.

‘Brothers, be so kind as to follow me.’

Then they all went through the wall which had just opened. One by one they collected at the other side and, as the light of their lanterns grew stronger, the place was illuminated. It was a great gallery, all made of marble, with wide columns and some stained-glass windows - it seemed like a temple or something similar. Some of the columns held inscriptions in Roman lettering and some drawings. The men started walking slowly forward and soon they could see an altar. They went up some marble stairs and were greeted by another iron door. In the middle of the door there was the design of a cross, and on the cross there were twelve locks.

Each of the monks carried a key hanging on a string around his neck. This key had been passed from father to son down the centuries. Each of the members there present held a seniority within the society which went from one to twelve, with the grand master holding the highest level. The monks removed the black strings from their necks and one by one, starting with the lowest in seniority, they placed their keys in a certain lock. The movements were synchronized, in that only when a monk of a lower level had turned his key could the next senior monk´s key be fitted. Thus the white monk´s key was the last one. After he had turned his key, once again a noise was heard from the other side. And when the noise stopped, three of the monks pushed against the great iron door, which opened.

Through the door they could see a small marble room decorated in gold and silver, with some drawings on the wall and some cuneiform inscriptions, a mixture of Egyptian and Sumerian. At the end of the room there was a big stone table and on it were twelve wooden boxes, side by side. The boxes had no locks or any apparent means of opening them. They were covered with dust. Then, one by one, each of the monks picked up a box. One of them should contain what was known as the Holy Grail, the holy chalice used by Jesus Christ at the Last Supper with his disciples, and which had been used by Joseph of Arimathaea to collect his blood when he was crucified. All the monks - important men, businessmen, politicians and even a prince - were the protectors of the Holy Grail and its secret, not of their own choice but because of a legacy passed down from father to son through the ages. These men were members of a secret society which called itself the Priorate of Sian. The name was no longer of much importance, as they had been unmasked in the previous century. Moreover, others had created secret societies with the same name. However these men were the members of the true Priorate of Sian, created centuries before to protect the Holy Grail and the secret of Jesus Christ on earth.

What none of the members knew was that the real Holy Grail was not in any of the boxes. One of them contained a perfect replica of the chalice, but the real one had been very well hidden under the control of the grand master since the beginning; it had never been far from his family and would stay near them until the time arrived. Everything that had happened that night was only a show, to direct attention away from the real location of the most precious relic on earth. The theater was necessary, for amongst the members there could be traitors, or one of them could let slip information to an outsider without meaning to. The same show had been staged centuries before when the false Grail was buried in the little church. Perhaps at that time some information got out, because their enemies had got very close to the place where the false Grail was hidden. If there really was a traitor in their midst, the whole simulation would not be in vain.

The grand master knew this. The idea was that each of them should keep a box. So, in theory, none of them would know which box the sacred relic was in. In single file the monks left the chamber. They closed the main door, took the keys back and returned to the church, closing all the doors and passages through which they had passed. When they got back to the church they carried out some society rituals, were informed about some other matters, then embraced each other and left by the back door. Each one got into his car, which disappeared into the night. They returned to their own countries, to their homes, where they would conceal the box that each of them had taken, until the right moment came.

CHAPTER 5

Washington DC, 21st February 1991.

The US Senator for New York, George Griffin, was asleep in bed beside his wife. It was Sunday and the sun had not yet risen. It had been a cold night and the silence outside their big house was unusual for a Sunday. Normally the neighbors gave parties or dinners which lasted well into the night, infuriating the senator with music at top volume, which could be heard blocks away. George couldn´t understand how today´s young people could enjoy that sort of music, let alone at that volume. George and his wife lived in a big house, number 3053 on P Street Northwest in Washington DC. They had moved there from New York in

the eighties.

After a few minutes, the first rays of the sun began to shine through the glass door which gave on to the veranda of the senator´s suite. The next thing that happened was that a buzzer began to sound insistently, at the frequency of those dog whistles, tormenting and without let-up. The senator´s wife Jane was the first to hear it. She started to shift around in the bed, and tried to cover her head with the blanket, but in vain: she couldn´t get the noise out of her head. It wasn´t six a.m. yet, and on Sundays they usually got up after ten. She tried shutting each ear with a pillow but this didn´t work either, so Jane decided to wake her husband and get him to find out where the damned noise was coming from, and to put a stop to it. Lying face down with the pillows over her head, Jane, who slept on the right hand side of the bed, stretched out her long right arm and started shaking the senator, who had always been a heavy sleeper. They could be dropping bombs on Washington just then and the senator would sleep through it. He realized that someone was shaking him but preferred to ignore the fact, hoping that it was just a dream, or even a nightmare, or simply that the unfortunate person that was doing it would stop. Jane knew her husband wouldn´t wake up easily, so she decided to take the pillows off her head and call him by name.

‘George, can´t you hear that damn noise?’

‘Er… What noise?’ grumbled the senator still half asleep, and lacking the courage to open his eyes.

‘That infernal buzzing, what could it be?’

The senator had no choice, he would have to get up and find out where the damned buzzing was coming from, or he wouldn´t be able to get back to sleep. Gradually he got his eyes open, rubbed them with his hands to help him wake up, and slowly struggled to his feet like a zombie. He and his wife had stayed up late watching old movies. It was a rare privilege, as they were almost always invited out for dinners or other social events.

‘That noise really is most irritating!’ exclaimed the senator, as he fumbled for his glasses on the bedside table.

He got up then and started walking round the room, trying to see where the noise was coming from. He went from side to side, but the volume of the buzzing didn´t seem to vary. He looked through the glass of the door which gave on to the veranda, trying to see if there was anything in the road responsible for the noise. He opened the veranda door and went out. The sound diminished. Then he closed the veranda door from the outside: the sound stopped.

‘The noise can only be coming from inside the house. Could it be something to do with the wiring?’ he asked himself.

He went back into the room, walked over to the door, opened it and went out. Once again the noise ceased. How could the sound be audible only from inside the room? He went back in and closed the door. He went over and unplugged the TV and DVD player, but the sound continued. It was just then that he felt a twitch of unease, remembering what was hidden in his room and what his father had said to him years before.

‘It’s not possible. Could the time have come?’ he thought aloud.

‘What did you say, honey? Time for what?’ asked Jane, who was frightened at the expression on her husband’s face. ‘What’s

going on?’

‘Honey, please, get away from the bed, I’ve got to move it,’ said the senator, plucking up his courage.

‘Move the bed? What are you talking about?’ answered his wife, getting increasingly worried.

‘Help me push!’

The two of them started to push the bed, dragging it across the wooden floor.

‘I have to open the safe.’

‘But honey, the safe isn’t under the bed, it’s in our dressing room. Are you feeling OK?’

George kneeled down, applied pressure to one of the floor boards and slipped his hand behind the wall, where he had pressed the wood down. He pulled a lever which was hidden behind the wall and at once, as if by magic, a piece of the floor gave way, revealing a hole where a safe attached to the hidden wall could be seen.

‘This safe!’ exclaimed George with an enigmatic look.

‘But how did that safe get there? Why didn´t you ever tell me about it?’ asked his wife with a rather hurt expression.

‘Honey, I couldn´t tell you or anyone about this safe. If someone had threatened you you’d have told them all about it.’

‘What do you keep in this safe?’

George supported his weight with his hands on the floor and lowered his legs into the hole. He began to enter the combination of the lock. There were more than ten numbers and ten letters. Then they heard the click as the workings of the old safe slotted into place. George pulled the door towards him and they could see a fluorescent green light coming from the back of the safe, from inside an ancient wooden box which was hidden under some papers. He took hold of the box and pulled it slowly towards him. He lifted it very carefully with his two hands and placed it on the wooden floor. He re-locked the safe and, supporting himself on the floor, pushed up with his legs and got out of the hole.

With the wooden box removed from the safe the buzzing had got even louder, and was now almost deafening. George pulled a lever set at one end of the hole, and the floorboards returned to their original position.

George picked up the box carefully and with both hands placed it on the bed.

‘Honey, please, tell me what that thing is. Is it radioactive? What’s that light?’ asked Jane, still worried.

‘Calm down, woman, you will understand. Don´t worry, it isn’t radioactive - at least, I don´t think it is.’

The senator opened the old wooden box and slowly, with one hand, drew out of it a chalice which was also made of wood.

‘Look at that, honey. Can you guess what it is?’ asked the senator with a wide smile on his face.

‘No idea. An old wooden jug?’ replied his wife sarcastically.

‘It’s what they call the Holy Grail.’

‘The Holy Grail? My God, then it’s been with you the whole time?’

‘The Holy Grail never left the hands of our family. My ancestors made a number of replicas and scattered them around the world. Wars and more wars have been fought because of it. Many people thought they were in possession of the true Grail, millionaire collectors and even the Vatican have replicas they believe are the real thing. If the true Grail had fallen into the wrong hands, humanity today would be lost.’

‘But how so? How can a mere relic have such power over humanity?’

‘My dear, the Holy Grail isn’t just any old relic. It’s the source of the power of God here on earth. It contains the blood of the son of God and it’s through this blood that Jesus will be born again on earth to save us once more.’

‘I’m sorry honey, but I don’t see any blood there. And what’s this light shining out of the base of the chalice?’

The senator gripped the chalice with his two hands against his chest. With an effort he broke off the base.

‘Honey have you gone mad - you´ve just destroyed the Holy Grail?’ said Jane, desperately trying to stop her husband.

‘Watch this.’

George, holding the chalice by the handle, twisted it against the palm of his right hand. A shining object slipped out onto his hand. It was obvious that the noise was coming from the object. In a few seconds the noise stopped and the bright green light went out.

‘Honey, this is the real Holy Grail. This container holds the blood of Jesus Christ our Lord, who is also our distant ancestor.’

‘Ancestor?’ asked Jane, who was quite bewildered by all this.

‘Honey, sit here on the bed, I´ll tell you the whole story. You and I are distant cousins. Our great-grandfathers were brothers. For safety’s sake the surnames were changed, something we always do when danger gets close. Our family is directly descended from Jesus Christ. Jesus and Mary Magdalene had a daughter called Sarah, and we are descended from Sarah. How do you think the Holy Grail got into my possession? Joseph of Arimathaea left it in Sarah’s keeping for her to pass to her children and them to their children, and so on. Of course, the family of Sarah never faced difficulties; there were always people close by to protect the keepers of the Grail. For centuries the Holy Grail has been hidden, guarded and protected. A secret society was formed to guard the secret and the true whereabouts of the Grail. This society, centuries after the death of Christ, after wars and tribulations and a break-up, has been brought together again and given the name Priorate of Sian.

‘Heavens, this is all just so amazing,’ said Jane, her eyes full of tears.

‘At the time Jesus died, an angel went to Joseph of Arimathaea and gave him this cylinder. The angel told him to collect the blood of Jesus and keep it in here, and said that only those with traces of the DNA of Jesus could open it. And what’s more, he said that Jesus would be reborn from the blood which Joseph saved. The idea was to keep the DNA practically intact, and so in the first century, after Sarah had had children and grandchildren, it was decided that our family would only marry within itself. I think that this too was an instruction given to Sarah herself by the angel, years after her first children were born.’

‘And how are you proposing to get Jesus reborn from this blood?’

‘By cloning!’

‘Cloning? I don´t believe it. Who could make a human clone?’

‘Someone very close to you,’ said George, and she fell silent, thinking, for a few seconds.

‘Ah, now I understand, that was why you insisted that Thomas should take up genetic engineering. It’s your plan for him to make a clone of Jesus?’ asked his wife, angry now, trying to organize her thoughts and recollections, and remembering how George had channeled the desires and the studies of her son Thomas towards genetics. ‘But a human clone has never been made before, how could it be done?’

‘It is possible; our current technology is very advanced. It only hasn’t been done yet because no government or company was willing to fund the research, but theoretically it’s possible and that’s what Thomas studied. We need him to make the clone. This secret, Jane, cannot go outside our family. And one more thing: Jesus will have to be born in the womb of our granddaughter Sarah.’

‘My God, my little granddaughter!’

‘I always knew that the Grail would manifest itself around this time, but I didn´t think it would be so soon. Luckily Thomas has become a specialist in the field, and our granddaughter is mature enough to have a baby.’

‘But what if Sarah refuses?’

‘She can´t refuse, the future of humanity depends on her. My problem isn’t with Sarah, it’s with her father. He could be the one who’s reluctant, with all that stuff about ethics.’

‘I don´t get it. Why do you say the future of humanity is at stake?’

‘Jesus came to earth the first time to save us. God wanted to destroy the human race because we were losing faith and we were very disobedient. That was when Jesus intervened, to show God that we weren’t so bad after all and that we deserved a second chance.’

‘And we weren’t so bad after all. To prove it we just went ahead and killed the son of God,’ retorted his wife sarcastically.

‘I think all that was staged. If Jesus hadn’t died and risen again, perhaps he wouldn´t be remembered as he is today, and the human race wouldn´t have recovered its faith in God. I think his mission was partially fulfilled.’

‘And why does Jesus have to be reborn from his blood? Can´t he just come back again?’

‘Humanity has to be prepared for his return and we can only prepare humanity with the help of Jesus himself. Maybe Jesus will be made flesh in this clone we are to make, maybe not, I´m not sure. I have some theories, but nothing certain; we will only know for sure when the baby is born. Honey, you can´t talk about this to anyone. Now we are in greater danger than before: if our enemies discover our plans we will all be killed. The lords of the world are controlled by hidden forces, and the same lords of the world have been after us for years.’

‘These lords of the world you talk about - are they part of that secret society the Illuminati you´re always mentioning?’

‘Exactly that; the Illuminati are controlled by Satan and he is the one most interested in preventing Jesus from returning or being reborn. Otherwise he will be unable to rule our planet. Let´s accept that many members of the Illuminati are only in it because they believe they are doing good, but they have no idea what is really going on. They control a secret society called the Bilderberg Club, you must have heard me mention it. Its members are no more, no less than the owners of the world. Kings, princes, queens, presidents, bankers, press magnates, politicians, billionaires. Their intention is to control the world and create a single government, strong enough to run things as it wants in whatever country. When this happens, Satan will take power, for this is the only way he can dominate the whole world. Just imagine if Satan became president of the USA today. If he was unmasked and started doing what he plans to with the planet, other countries would go to war with America and even America couldn´t survive with the whole world against it. If he takes power through a single world government, no one will be able to stop him, countries wouldn´t go to war with their own government. Then we will live in eternal slavery, and the human race will be lost. Only the return of Jesus can stop that.’

‘But honey, you talk as if Satan was a being of flesh and blood.’

‘Jane, Satan is as much flesh and blood as you or I.’

CHAPTER 6

New York, 21st February 1991

The old telephone started ringing at eleven in the morning. The phone was in the living room and Thomas was in his bedroom. He had gone to bed at eight a.m., after a night spent poring over the results of researches and tests in his personal laboratory, which was set up in one of the bedrooms of his New York apartment. Thomas could hear the phone ringing in the distance, but he didn´t have the strength to get up and go to the living room to answer it. He decided to ignore it and hope they’d give up. Who’d be calling him at eleven o’clock on a Sunday morning? Thomas lived alone in a large apartment. His wife had left him several years earlier precisely because of his obsession with research, his unending work and the unearthly hours he kept, leaving no time for the family. His wife, who was fed up with the whole thing, decided to move in with their daughter Sarah until she found her own place, but ended up staying. The phone went on ringing, they didn´t give up, and Thomas had even more difficulty getting up than his father George. But it seemed he had no choice: either he answered the damned phone or it would go on ringing all day. He got up with his eyes still shut and fumbled his way along the wall until he found the light switch. He switched on the light, opened the bedroom door, and dragged himself along the corridor, in his under-pants and slippers.

‘Hallo, Thomas here,’ he answered the phone sleepily.

‘Thomas, son, it’s Dad.’

‘Dad? Is this a decent hour to make phone calls?’

‘It’s gone eleven, son. I´m sorry if I woke you up, but it’s serious.’

‘Hah, everything’s serious for you. Tell me.’

Thomas was used to his father’s idea of what was serious. Everything was serious for George, whether he called to talk about some chemical product discovered in some foodstuff, or about politics - a serious matter for a senator, but of no importance to a scientist like Thomas.

‘Son, it’s urgent. I need you to come to Washington at once.’

This worried George and at once he was fully awake.

‘Is something wrong with Mummy? How is she?’

‘Don´t worry, it’s not about your mother. But I need you to come here, today if possible.’

‘OK, OK! I´ll have a bath and be on my way. I just hope it really is important.’

Thomas knew that if his father required his presence on a Sunday, it must really be something serious or he’d have discussed it over the phone. But George wouldn´t say anything about it in advance. So Thomas took a shower to wake himself up while the machine made coffee. He put on comfortable clothes, drank his coffee, ate a piece of cake that someone had left in the refrigerator, then went down to the building’s parking lot to get his car and drive to the capital. Thomas was very curious to know what his father had to say, and wouldn´t have been able to sleep until he knew. When he got to the car he remembered that his daughter Sarah might like to visit her grandparents. Inside the car, he called her on his cell phone.

‘Hallo!’ Sarah picked up at once. She had a pleasant voice.

‘Hi, princess, it’s Dad.’

‘Hi Dad, it’s great you called. But what are you doing awake at this hour on a Sunday?’ she asked sarcastically.

‘Yes, well, your grandfather phoned and woke me up. He needs to talk to me in person. I´m just leaving for Washington, I´m actually in the car, and I remembered you´ve been wanting to visit them. How about going with me?’

‘Ah, Dad, it’s Monday tomorrow. Some of us have got to work, you know …’

‘Ah, yes, I’d forgotten that little detail. You know how it is … Working for myself I sometimes forget there are people who are slaves to schedules. But, look, I´m going today and I´ll come back early tomorrow. It’s a five-hour drive: you´ll be back early tomorrow, you´ll only miss half a day’s work.’

‘OK, then, fine, I´ll go. It’s ages since I’ve seen grandpa and grandma. They´re always busy. And I’ve got plenty of credit at work, they must owe me a year’s time off!’

‘Right, that’s agreed. I´ll drop by and pick you up in twenty minutes. Get yourself ready.’

‘OK, great, big kiss!’

Thomas drove his BMW out of the parking lot and turned towards West Broadway. When he was close to his daughter’s building he could see her waiting for him in front of it.

Sarah was a red-head, with long wavy hair, blue eyes and a figure which drew looks wherever she went. She worked in a multinational company as a trainee in the financial department. She had graduated in Economics from Harvard, and as one of the best students she had been offered the job during her final year. Luckily it was only after her first day at work that they discovered she was the granddaughter of one of the US’ most popular senators; otherwise her colleagues at university or at work might have suspected favoritism or some such thing. Sarah always tried to prove the worth of her intellect, since usually things came easily to her because of her looks. However she wanted to believe that she achieved things because of her competence, not because of her beauty. Which was why, on the day she went for the interview for the job at the multinational which now was hers, she had gone dressed in a very dull suit, hair straight and bound up, with glasses and no makeup - doing her best to minimize her looks so that no one could say she was hired because of her pretty face.

Thomas drew his car up beside her. Sarah got in and they set off for the capital.

‘How’s your mother? She didn´t want to come too?’

‘No, Dad, she’s got something on this afternoon,’ said Sarah, without looking directly at her father.

‘Something on? With who?’ Thomas asked, feeling indignant but trying to hide the fact that it mattered to him.

‘Take it easy, Dad, she’s going to Sherry’s house for a book club thing. This week they´re discussing a book with a weird title, in Latin, I think it’s called “From Eve to Homo Amans”

by a Portuguese writer called Rosa de Souza. I gather it’s about a woman called Joanna who pretended to be a man, was elected Pope, and managed to deceive the Vatican until she got pregnant and was uncovered. It also talks about the Catholic Church’s repression of women and about human potential. Sounds like a cool book. In fact it’s an audio book - these days Mum only buys books on disc and listens to them while she’s on the treadmill

or at the gym.’

‘She’s going to a gym, is she?’ asked her father, looking incredulous.

‘Yes, well, Dad, there is life after marriage, didn´t you know? And she’s getting back into her old shape. So if you don´t try and get back together with her soon, you´re going to miss the boat.’

‘And who says I want to get back together with her?’

‘Oh, Dad, I know you so well… But, tell me, what does grandpa want you for? Do you think he’s going to resign from the Senate?’

‘Resign? Where on earth did you hear such nonsense?’

‘I don´t know, I just thought, if he wanted to stand as president, he’s going to have to resign and start campaigning.’

‘But the elections are two years away. And from what he told me, he didn´t accept the nomination. He said the president would have to be someone different in the near future, and also that presidents who don´t join a certain group end up dead.’

‘Grandpa and his persecution manias and conspiracy theories…’

Some hours later…

‘We’re here, princess, you can wake up,’ said Thomas, resting his hand lightly on his daughter’s shoulder.

‘Heavens, I dropped off and missed it all. This classical music of yours is enough to put anyone to sleep.’

Thomas parked the car in one of the outside parking spaces belonging to the big house on the corner, grabbed their bags and went towards the front door with his daughter. He pressed the interphone and as soon as he took his finger off the button, the door opened. George had seen them coming some time ago. The senator had installed a number of security cameras, covering all the outside of the house, as well as sensors which gave warning if anyone stepped on the pavement in front of the house. Even though he lived in a peaceful neighborhood, and had military training and an arsenal to turn any arms fanatic green with envy, the senator was even more of a security freak; of course, both his political status and his secret identity called for the maximum precautions. If their enemies were capable of killing even presidents who were protected by men of the secret service and a solid security scheme, what chance had a

mere senator?

‘Sarah, my dear, what a nice surprise!’ exclaimed the doting grandfather.

‘Hi, grandpa, I’ve missed you!’ said Sarah, planting a noisy kiss on her grandfather’s pink cheek.

‘Your father forgot to mention you’d be coming with him. I´ll ask them to set a place for you at table. Please come in and make yourselves at home.’

‘Oh, grandpa, you know Daddy. Absent-minded isn’t the word.’

‘But it’s good you´ve come, now I can kill two birds with one stone. What I want to talk to your father about concerns you directly.’

‘Really? Now you have got me wondering. Tell me at once.’

‘Dad, where’s Mum?’ asked Thomas looking worried.

‘Don´t worry, son, your mother’s in the bath and will be down in a moment. Please both of you sit down. Help yourselves, you must be famished.’

‘That´s true, Daddy didn´t want to stop on the way for us to eat, we came right here,’ said Sarah, filling a bowl with fruit salad.

‘But tell me, senator, what is it that’s so important that you need to talk about it face to face?’

‘Easy, Thomas, wait for your mother to come down and I´ll tell you. Meanwhile, just eat something; it’s bad to get excited on an empty stomach.’

‘Excited? Oh, my God!’ exclaimed Sarah, sounding worried, and thinking now that it must be some illness in the family.

‘Oh my dears, how I’ve missed you!’ said Jane as she came down the stairs.

‘Hi, grandma!’

‘Hi, Mum!’

They both greeted her at once, while they were giving the Griffin family matriarch a hug.

‘Thomas didn´t say you were coming, Sarah, but it’s good

you did.’

‘Dad wanted to surprise you,’ replied Sarah, looking at her father for him to see that she was teasing him, but making him uncomfortable.

‘Well, now that all the interested parties are here, I´ll get started. Please listen closely to what I say and trust in the truth of it, because this isn’t a joke or a test.’

‘Tell us quickly grandpa, you´re making me nervous.’

‘Nervous? You ain’t seen nothing yet!’ replied the senator. ‘This is what I want to show you,’ and he laid the broken chalice on the table, and beside it the cylinder that had been inside the chalice.

‘Dad, what is that?’ asked Thomas, intrigued. George had spent all his life telling him stories about the Holy Grail, showing him paintings and diagrams. Thomas had recognized it the moment he set eyes on it.

‘It’s exactly what you´re thinking, Thomas. This is the much sought-after and famous Holy Grail.’

‘Holy Grail? But grandpa, if Jesus was the King of the Jews, shouldn´t the chalice he used be a lot prettier than this? I think you were had when they sold you this replica. Anyway, everyone knows that the Holy Grail represents the womb of Mary Magdalene and the lineage of Jesus. I read a book about it at University: it said the term Holy Grail comes from a translation of Saint Graal and from the ancient forms San Graal and Sangréal, or Royal Blood, according to a half-baked theory about Jesus having a son with Mary Magdalene.’

The senator chuckled.

‘Not a son, a daughter. What was written in that book and what is known nowadays about the Holy Grail are just some of the stories we invented over the centuries to conceal the true secret of the Grail. Some bits are true, of course, like the bit about Jesus having a daughter, but others are pure fiction.’

‘You invented?’ said Thomas with a serious look.

‘Yes, son, we invented. Our family, through the centuries, made up these stories and other ones, some caught on, some didn´t. Well, let me get straight to the point. This is the real chalice used by Jesus at the Last Supper with his disciples. On the day he died, an angel appeared to Joseph of Arimathaea, gave him this gold and silver cylinder which I have here, and told him to collect the blood of Jesus and save it in the tube. Joseph did as he was told and the cylinder sealed itself and has never been opened: this means that the blood of Jesus has been kept in here for nearly two thousand years. Now you must be wondering why this chalice and this cylinder are here with me. Easy to explain, my dears. Both I and your mother and, therefore, the two of you, are of Sarah’s family.’

Sarah interrupted the senator the moment she heard her name.

‘Sarah? What Sarah, grandpa?’

‘Relax, princess, let me explain. Sarah is the name of the earliest member of our family. It was in her honor that I persuaded your parents to give you this name. And she, Sarah, is none other than the daughter of Jesus and Mary Magdalene.’

There was silence in the dining room. Tears rolled down Sarah’s face. The story had touched her deeply and yet she wasn´t sure if she believed it was true. However her grandfather wasn´t one to make up stories and even less likely to lie. So subconsciously at least she knew that she really was a distant descendant of the greatest being ever to have set foot on the face of the earth: Jesus Christ.

‘Grandpa, I´m speechless.’

‘Dad, are you sure of what you´re saying? And how can Mum be of the same family? She wasn´t called Griffin before you two got married.’

‘A good observation. Since the end of the first century, Christ’s descendants have not been allowed to marry outside the family. There are even records of brother and sister marrying. Your mother Jane is the great-granddaughter of my great-grandfather’s brother. Sarah’s mother is the granddaughter of a cousin of mine. I.e. we’re all one family. This was necessary so that the DNA of Jesus shouldn´t be totally diluted and lost in the world.’

‘But father, how could I marry a cousin? It had to be a huge coincidence.’

‘Son, the day that you met Sarah’s mother it had already all been planned. You had been promised to each other since you were born, as your mother and I were. All we’ve done all these years has been to give fate a little help in couples’ finding each other, getting to know each other and, as a result, falling in love. Jessica’s mother knew everything and always encouraged your relationship.’

‘I just can´t believe that you manipulated me,’ grumbled Thomas indignantly, showing his disapproval.

‘Son, we did nothing except give a little shove. Jessica married you because she loved you, in other words, the two of you truly fell in love.’

‘And what if we hadn’t fallen in love, what would you have done? Would you have obliged us to get married?’

‘Of course not! You have a number of cousins you don´t know, all very pretty. Let´s not be unduly modest - we have great genes, it’s rare for anyone unattractive to be born in this family. In the old days everything was easier, the parents told their children who they were to marry and that was it, no argument. More recently all that changed, which was unfortunate, and we had to change tactics; but what’s important is that it worked out and here were all are today.’

‘Grandpa, just tell the story straight. It’s totally unreal, I can´t believe I´m not dreaming,’ said Sarah, holding her head in both hands and running her fingers through her hair.

‘As I was saying, the angel told Joseph of Arimathaea that when the right moment came, Jesus would be born again from his own blood, and that only someone of his line would be able to open the cylinder you see here. Our more distant ancestors didn´t have any very clear idea of what “being reborn through the blood” actually implied. They thought it would be enough to open the cylinder and tip the blood into the chalice, or something like that, for Jesus to return. I was the first one to realize what the angel was really saying to Joseph - that a clone should be born from that blood. That´s the only possible explanation. And that’s why all your life I’ve been encouraging you and pushing you to become a genetic scientist, because you´re the one who’s going to create a clone of Jesus Christ.’

‘Dad, you´ve got to be crazy. Cloning humans is illegal and unethical. And even if it was permitted, research on cloning is still in its infancy. Some scientists have tried cloning animals and most of the clones were still-born or deformed, or didn´t live for a month.’

‘What about those frogs they cloned in 1952 using tadpole cells? Didn´t you do your master’s thesis on that?’ asked his father.

‘Yes, don´t you remember that I managed to clone a frog when I was doing my master’s? I even brought it home for you to see. The difference with amphibians is that the complete regeneration of the tissues is a natural characteristic, which makes it easier to do.’

‘Of course I remember. And do you remember who encouraged you to choose this subject for your thesis?’

‘Yes, I remember very well that you practically forced me to do it. You even gave me equipment for my laboratory as an incentive, didn´t you?’

‘Your thesis was highly praised and drew plenty of comment at Harvard,’ recalled his father. ‘I´m quite certain that when we clone Jesus from his own blood he won’t die - after all, he did come back to life once before,’ retorted George confidently, looking quite unworried.

‘I´m very sorry, Dad, but don´t count on me to help you on this. I could lose my license or, worse, go to jail. And even if you find someone to do the cloning, you´ll still need a uterus to carry the child.’

‘Yes, well, that we already have: I´m looking at it now,’ said George, with his eyes on Sarah.

‘Me, grandpa?! It’s… You really have gone crazy!’ Sarah was flabbergasted. ‘Grandma, don´t you have anything to say?’

‘Darling, listen to your grandfather. He’s telling the truth and this has got to be done. It’s the mission the two of you have to carry out.’

‘Thomas, Sarah, what I´m telling you is of the utmost importance. The existence of the human race as we know it depends on you two. First, as the angel instructed, Jesus will have to be reborn through and by his blood, that is, as we understand it today, he must be cloned and brought to birth in the womb of a woman of his line. If it wasn´t so, why would the cylinder only open for someone with traces of Jesus’ DNA in his blood?’

‘That´s was the legend says, but I bet anyone at all could open the cylinder,’ retorted Thomas.

George got up, went over to the wall and picked up the house phone.

‘John, could you come in here please?’ John was the senator´s personal guard, and had worked for him for many years.

‘John, you see this cylinder. Here at the end of it there’s a hollow which exactly fits the end of a finger. Please take hold of it and put your finger in the hollow.’

The guard did as he was asked, putting his finger on the spot where the cylinder was supposed to open.

‘Nothing happened, senator. Will that be all?’

‘That’s all, John, many thanks. You can go now,’ said George. ‘Thomas, now I want you to do what he did,’ and he handed the cylinder to his son.

‘Father, perhaps that isn’t the way it opens.’

‘Just do exactly what John did.’

‘OK, but it’s not going to open.’

Thomas put his forefinger on the end of the cylinder and immediately it began to emit a bright green light. Thomas withdrew his finger in fright and threw the cylinder on the table.

‘You see, son, how do you explain the fact that the cylinder reacts to you and not to John? If any one of us puts a finger on the right spot, a light will appear, and all we have to do is turn the finger one way and the cylinder the other for it to open.’

‘Grandpa, this thing looks like an alien artifact. Look at these inscriptions: they´re like hieroglyphics, I’ve never seen anything like them.’

‘OK, Dad, you´ve convinced me that the thing is programmed to open with our family’s DNA. But tell me something: if one of our ancestors cheated on their spouse, would the blood easily be diluted?’

‘Out of the question! Years ago everything was carefully worked out and our family was always very strict. The women couldn´t even look at another man, and they never went out on their own. Today it’d be easier.’

‘I understand, Dad, but why did you say that humanity depends on this cloning? Is it just one of your conspiracy theories?’

‘Son, they´re not just theories. All the stories I told you when you were a child, the best time for the brain to retain them, were true. I´ll summarize those stories, and in time you´ll discover more. I’ve got some documents that you must read later, which will help to explain things.

‘Now listen to this: there was a time when God wanted to destroy the earth, humanity had strayed and no longer believed in him. Jesus was one of those responsible for the creation of man, perhaps the prime mover. He wanted to show his Father that our species goes off the tracks because of what is happening around us, but that our essence is good. He asked God to give him a chance; he said he would go to earth to prove that part of humankind was good. He said too that if we didn´t recover our faith, God could destroy humanity. A deal was proposed and God accepted the deal. Jesus was born on earth in a hybrid body, part human, part divine. Jesus was right: some humans were good, but the great majority had been corrupted. Jesus left a legacy of love which survives till this day. If it wasn´t for the teaching of Jesus at that time, if he hadn’t existed, humanity would have destroyed itself all on its own. What keeps part of humanity going is belief in Jesus; the rest are motivated by self-interest, or rather by fear of going to hell.

‘Many religions have been formed based on the word of Jesus. Most of them lost their way, it’s true, particularly the Catholic Church, which always did terrible things to its fellow humans in the name of Jesus. But the Son of God did prove that man’s essence is good, and that our mistakes are due to the environment in which each of us is brought up. If we are brought up in an atmosphere of hate, we grow up hating. But if we grow up isolated from the world and from any kind of influence, our tendency is to practice good not evil.

‘To change the subject a little: do you remember that the Bible says that Lucifer was cast out of heaven with other angels? Well, Lucifer’s plan was always to take God’s place, in other words he wants to be the king of planet Earth. There is a secret society you are familiar with, called Illuminati. The Illuminati are servants of Lucifer and they control another society called the Bilderberg Club. This Club you´ve never heard of, but it consists of kings, princes, queens, presidents, politicians, billionaires - the lords of the world. Most of the members are people who honestly believe they are doing humanity a favor, intending to set up a single global government, unelected by the people: their principal goal is to rule the earth and do away with hunger, poverty and war in return for power and more power. What they don´t know is that behind them there is a more powerful force manipulating them. And behind that force is Lucifer. When the club succeeds in setting up the New World Order, Lucifer will take over. And the day is very near. The UN, NATO, the G7 and more recently the European Union are all institutions created with the purpose of forming a single cell of power, controlled by the few.’

‘But why doesn’t Lucifer take power now. Why must he wait till the world is run by a single body?’ asked Sarah, looking worried.

‘My dear, this was what I explained to your grandmother early this morning. Suppose that Lucifer became president of the USA, the most powerful nation on earth. If this happened and he began to do what he plans, other countries would go to war with the US, we would have a nuclear war and life on earth would end. If Lucifer waits till there is a New World Order, a single body of power, no one will go to war with him, he will declare himself god of the earth and no one will be able to stop him. That´s the difference. He’s waiting for the right moment, and that moment is coming.’

‘But, father, do you think the clone of Jesus will be able to stop such powerful people?’

‘Son, you haven’t understood. My theory is that this clone’s purpose is to facilitate Jesus’ return - he will be reincarnated in the clone and show the world that he’s back, and then he’ll fight against the New World Order being established; after all, he’s the Son of God, he must have some powers. A man who could cure crowds, raise the dead and rise from the dead himself must be pretty powerful; and if the angel said he should be born again at a time like this one, then I think it must be precisely to fight against these lords of the world. Now do you understand the importance of all this?’

Sarah got up with her hand over her eyes, walked into the living room and threw herself down on the sofa. The others followed her, concerned at how she was reacting.

‘What is it, darling?’ asked Jane, worried about her granddaughter.

‘Nothing, grandma. I´m just trying to digest all this, trying to believe. Reason tells me not to believe in this sort of stuff, but my heart is telling me the opposite. My brain’s at war.’

‘Yes, Dad,’ said Thomas, ‘I need to digest all this too and think it through. Can I take this blood to my lab to analyze it?’

‘Of course you can, but not today. I want you both to sleep here and go home tomorrow morning early. Your mother and I are going upstairs and we’ll leave you on your own to talk this over. It’s very important you don´t discuss this with anyone else, especially not with your mother, Sarah. Good night to you both.’

CHAPTER 7

Washington DC, 22nd February 1991

At the senator´s house it was morning. By eight a.m. they had all come downstairs for breakfast. George was the last to descend, bringing two CDs with him. He had spent the night recording and encrypting the CDs with old family files, and details of the family tree, proof of everything he had told his son and granddaughter.

‘Thomas and Sarah, these CDs are for you. They are encrypted with a 2048-bit key, impossible to break without the password. The password is at the back of the family portrait I gave you last Christmas.’

The senator had given each of them an oil painting of the whole family in a group. It had been painted from a photo which had been taken the previous Christmas, when practically the whole Griffin clan was present. That was the only time it was possible to get everybody together.

‘You´ll find a lot of answers in this CD,’ George went on. ‘Thomas, take this parcel, I´ve put the cylinder in it. Please, take good care of it.’

‘Don´t worry, Dad.’

The Griffins finished breakfast and said their goodbyes. Thomas and Sarah took the highway back to New York. As they drove they talked over what had happened, about all the revelations George had made. Both of them were intrigued and pleased to have a part to play in events of such importance.

‘Daddy, I couldn´t sleep last night, thinking about all that grandpa said, and I came to a decision: I want you to make this clone and I want to give birth to it,’ said Sarah with absolute certainty.

‘But daughter, it´s very dangerous. If something went wrong I´d never forgive myself,’ answered Thomas in a worried voice, stroking his daughter´s hair.

‘Daddy, I trust you and, if the worst came to the worst, what could go wrong? You do inseminations every day at your clinic.’

Thomas was a scientist and university lecturer, as well as a consultant to businesses. And he ran a fertilization clinic where he treated women who couldn´t conceive, and carried out artificial insemination procedures.

‘Cloning is a lot more complex. I will have to take an egg of yours, or another egg, and strip the genetic material from it; then I will take a cell from the donor (which will be cloned) and join it to the egg by a process of electro fusion. In this way the embryo will be formed. However the egg may reject the donor´s genetic material and, even if there is no rejection, the child that is born will have nothing of yours, he won’t really be your son, you will merely be providing the womb. And the child could be born dead or deformed. Are you prepared to take such risks?’

‘Daddy, he’ll be my son. Bringing up a child is to be its mother just as much as giving birth to it is.’

Thomas knew he wasn’t going to be able to get this idea out of his daughter’s head; after all, she always got what she wanted. Since she was a little girl she had been very spoilt by her mother and especially by her grandparents.

‘I’ll analyze this blood. If everything´s alright with it I’ll think about what you’ve said.’

Thomas left Sarah at work and went straight to the laboratory at his clinic, which was nearby. When he got there he hurried into the building, anxious to get the analysis done, and he barely greeted the staff and patients. He locked himself in the laboratory and gave instructions not to be disturbed. He put on his white coat and his mask, and took the cylinder out of the parcel his father had made. He looked around to make sure nobody was in the lab, and then he put his finger over the crack at the top of the cylinder, which immediately lit up. With one hand holding the base, and the other the top of the object, he twisted them in opposite directions and with a little click the cylinder opened. Very carefully he tried to pour a drop of blood on to a slide, but the blood would not pour. In fact it wasn’t possible to see the blood inside the cylinder, as the duct inside it was very narrow.

He carefully inserted some cotton wool on a very thin stick into the recipient, and when he withdrew it the tip was dark red, confirming that there really was blood inside. He wiped the cotton wool on the slide – the blood was thick and dark but, amazingly, it had been conserved in that cylinder for nearly two thousand years. Since his father had told him the story, Thomas was almost sure that there was no longer any blood in the tube, since after so many centuries it could have dried out, and in this case it wouldn’t be possible to collect genetic material.

Thomas collected a little more blood. He decided he would use an electronic microscope powerful enough to see even the DNA chain. The analysis would take a little longer, but the precision would be much greater. The microscope had been donated by a billionaire friend of his father’s and cost something in the region of five million dollars, an unimaginably vast sum for Thomas and his humble clinic. After many minutes of waiting, the result of the analysis of the blood started to show up on the computer screen. While this was happening Thomas had gone out of the laboratory to get a cup of coffee. With one eye on his coffee and the other on the computer screen, which he could see from a distance through the glass, he could see that something was appearing on the screen. He swallowed his coffee in a single gulp, burning his throat as it went down, and ran back to the computer. His main objective was to compare the DNA of the blood with his own. He could see on the screen the structure of the cells, the chromosomes and, in small print, he could read the words:

DNA sequencing complete

Pairs of chromosomes = 24

Thomas was thunderstruck. His mouth grew dry. He couldn´t believe his eyes.

‘Impossible! The machine must be broken or badly adjusted!’

Naturally Thomas knew that monkeys have twenty-four pairs of chromosomes. Humans have 23 pairs. He decided to re-do the test, this time making a comparison with his own blood. He took a hypodermic needle and drew a little blood from his own arm, then placed it under the microscope and waited for the result. Eventually the result appeared:

Sequence 1 - 24 pairs of chromosomes

Sequence 2 - 23 pairs of chromosomes

DNA compatibility = 89.786%

Thomas refused to believe it and entered the result in a database which contained all the known species of animal, to find out what species the blood belonged to. But the result was negative: after hours searching the database the computer could find no species to which that DNA belonged. Everything began to become clear in Thomas’ mind. The blood didn´t belong to any race existing on this planet. The chimpanzee, with twenty-four pairs of chromosomes, exhibits approximately 97% of compatibility with human DNA. The genetic material he was testing wasn´t human, and it couldn´t be from this planet. In fact the blood was really Jesus’, and by all appearances Jesus really existed. That story his father had told was beginning to make sense. But something began to intrigue Thomas: how did Jesus successfully procreate with a human woman? Was Mary Magdalene human or a hybrid - half human and half alien?

Various suppositions and theories began to crowd into Thomas’ head. He started to weep with the strong emotions he was feeling. He was the first scientist in the world to have the chance to analyze the DNA of the greatest and most famous of all beings, Jesus Christ; and to cap it all he was a member of his family! Thomas was beside himself, he couldn´t keep this information to himself, he felt he must share it with someone. He was euphoric; but he realized that the information was too dangerous, nobody must know.

Now everything made sense, the stories about Jesus, the way Mary became pregnant while still a virgin - of course it must have been by artificial insemination: hence the legend of the Virgin Mary. Jesus’ powers were explained. It was clear that he belonged to a race which was mentally very advanced, with total control over his own mind and, thereby, able to perform the “miracles” which everyone talks about.

Without a second thought, Thomas took the samples out of the microscope, recorded on a diskette the results of the blood tests and instructed the computer to delete the research he had done, as someone could come across it. He hurried to the phone, picked up and dialed the number of his father’s house.

‘Hi, at the moment we can´t come to the phone. Please leave a message and we´ll get back to you soon. Thanks,’ said his father’s voice recorded on the answering machine.

‘Dad, you´ve no idea what I´ve found out! I analyzed the blood in the cylinder and I found something sensational. It doesn´t belong to any species known on this planet. As a matter of fact the DNA of this blood has 48 chromosomes, while human blood has 46. Isn´t it fantastic? By the way, I´ve decided to try and create the clone. Call me as soon as you get this message. Bye.’

CHAPTER 8

Brazil, 12th September 2001

Francisco and Maria were saying goodbye to their children and grandchildren. They had just buried their youngest son at the back of the house - he had died the day before in the reservoir which surrounded the couple´s farm. The farm was in the interior of the state of São Paulo, in a small town called Assis.

The boy, whose name was Davi and who was only eleven, had gone swimming in the reservoir as he often did, being an excellent swimmer. But on that day, the 11th September 2001, his father found him lifeless, lying on the bank of the reservoir. He had drowned. He usually went swimming alone, late in the afternoon, when dusk was falling. The family was distressed and hadn´t come to terms with the boy´s death.

In that part of Brazil, principally in the country areas, it was usual for the wake and the burial to take place on the family´s land. Some of the poorer families weren´t even aware of the requirement to inform the authorities of the death of a relation and to obtain a death certificate; others, in their despair, simply forgot about it.

After saying their goodbyes to the family members who had come for the wake, the couple took a bath and went to bed.

A few hours later, around two a.m., a car could be heard arriving. Maria woke up thinking that one of her sons had come back. The car stopped in front of the veranda. Two men in black suits got out and started slowly ascending the steps of the veranda. It was 12th September 2001. The men were tall and blond and they knocked at the door of the Giroto family. Maria was already in the living room. Without hesitation she went to the door, thinking it was one of her sons. When she opened the door she felt afraid because the men were so tall, and because they looked nothing like her sons. Maria´s husband, hearing sounds of movement, went to the front door with his rusty shotgun in his hands.

‘Be calm, husband, them be pastors from the church.’ Maria thought this was who they were, and that they had heard of the son’s death and come for the wake.

‘What the hell do they want at this hour?’

And then the men explained:

‘Lady, we aren´t pastors, but we´re here to talk about your son. We heard that he passed away and we´d like to offer our condolences,’ said one of the men.

‘We´re here because there is a very delicate matter we have to discuss,’ said the other man, talking quietly and surely, which gave the elderly couple confidence and they asked them in.

‘Sit down, please, gentlemen. I´ll get yer some coffee,’ said Maria with her country accent, typical of that part of Brazil.

‘Lady, that won´t be necessary, we won´t take up much of your time.’

‘Tell us then, please, how can we be of help?’

‘Lady, we´re Americans, we work for an American agency known as the CIA.’

The man showed them his badge.

‘Ah, I´ve heard of yer, you´re famous, always turning up in the movies. Yer must be very sad at what happened to those buildings, what a terrible thing, for God´s sake.’

‘Yes, lady, we´re all shocked. It was a great loss for humanity.’

‘But we´re here for another reason. My partner will explain.’

‘Lady, a very important American family is being hunted. Yesterday two members of the family were killed by very bad people. The only one of the family who survived is a boy who, as it happens, has the same name as your late son and almost the same age, just a year’s difference.’

‘But how do yer know about our son? He passed away yesterday and we ain´t even been to the registry office yet,’ said the woman with an astonished look.

‘Didn´t you call your family in Italy yesterday, to tell them? Well, we intercepted your call.’

Francisco leapt out of his chair.

‘You been snooping on us?’ the old man roared.

‘No, sir, please, calm down. All international calls are monitored for security purposes. We have software which identifies certain patterns, records them and sends them to us.’

‘Well, alright then, but just tell us what yer want. Can´t yer see we´re not up to coping with visitors? We´ve only just put our son in his grave.’

‘Right, then, as I was saying, two members of this American family were killed yesterday, and only their son survived. We need a place to hide the child. He needs a new name and a new family: if they find him he’ll be killed too. We´re here in the name of the American government to ask for your help.’

‘Yer want us to take on a child that isn´t ourn and that on top of that is being hunted? That´s not just illegal, it´s dangerous. Suppose those bad people find him here and kill us all!’ said the woman fearfully, but at the same time with compassion.

‘You won’t be taking a risk. We’ll watch you twenty-four hours a day and no one will find the boy here in Brazil. These bad people think the boy is dead too, that´s why he needs a new name and a new family.’

‘But what are we goin’ to tell our family and our friends and neighbors?’ asked the man.

‘As far as we know, only your family in Italy was told; your friends and neighbors don´t yet know your son is dead. All you have to do is not say anything more to anyone. Keep the boy hidden for a few years and no one will suspect. They´re not that different.’

‘Can we see the boy?’ asked the woman.

‘Of course! I’ll fetch him.’

The man brought David into the house. His face was all creased with the marks of the car’s upholstery and he was yawning like someone who hadn´t liked being woken like that.

When the couple saw David they felt happy and emotional.

‘Goodness me what a good-looking boy! He looks like an angel,’ said Maria, and began to weep as she remembered her own

dead son.

‘Just a moment, sir, I need to talk to me husband, I´ll be right back,’ said the old lady in a fearful tone of voice, as if she had something very important to say to him. The two of them went into the kitchen.

‘Husband, does yer remember once I told you I saw an angel?’

‘I remember, but that be some thirty years ago.’

‘And does yer remember what I told yer the angel said to me?’

Her husband’s face took on a look of amazement as he remembered how, thirty years before, his wife had woken in the middle of the night weeping bitterly, and had told him that she had seen an angel. The angel told her that one day men would come to her door and bring her a child, and that the child should stay with them and they should look after it well. Naturally none of the family believed what Maria said. Of course it had been a dream, real though it seemed to Maria. As time went by, she too became convinced that it was just a dream - after all, it was unimaginable.

‘So it weren’t a dream after all!’ exclaimed her husband, still shaken.

‘No, it weren´t. At the time I told yer it was too real to be a dream, but yer all talked me into believing it was a dream and I just kept quiet. It can´t be just coincidence. Let´s keep the boy.’

‘Alright, you´re the boss,’ said her husband, knowing that nothing he could do would make her change her mind.

They went back to the living room.

‘Alright, we’ll keep him, for sure,’ said Maria, taking David by the arm and giving him a gentle kiss on the cheek.

‘Thank you, lady, we knew we could count on you.’

‘Hello, David, how yer feeling?’ asked the woman, putting her hand under David’s chin.

David looked at one of the men, not understanding.

‘Lady, he doesn´t understand your language. But in a few months he’ll be talking fluently. Don´t worry about it.’

‘David, this is your new family. Look after them well and they’ll look after you,’ said the man in English, and said goodbye to David.

‘Goodbye, lady, here are our contact numbers. If there´s anything you need, just call. And as I said, please don’t tell anyone.’

The men went back to their car, started it up and disappeared up the dirt road.

David took over Davi´s room, his documents, his clothes and everything else of his. Only they couldn’t send him to the same school, since there they would realize it wasn´t Davi. The family had to put him into a different school in another town.

David became part of the family. Only the older sons and the grandchildren knew his story and they all promised to keep the secret. The boy always insisted on being called David, and his wish was respected.

Some days after David arrived at the farm, Francisco went into town to do some shopping and pay some bills at the bank. When he looked at his bank statement he saw that five million Reals had been put into his account. Francisco couldn´t believe it and went home and told his wife. He didn´t understand: could it be that the bank had made a mistake? His wife calmed him down and said it could be to do with the men who brought David. So the man told the bank he had inherited the money, paid off his many debts and never mentioned the matter to anyone again.

A year went by. David was speaking Portuguese fluently, like a native; it had taken him less than six months to become fluent. His facility for learning the language and his above-average intelligence astonished his adoptive parents and the whole family. David started helping his father in the day-to-day running of the farm, which was a coffee plantation. At last he was safe and happy.

CHAPTER 9

New York, 25th March 1992

It was a little past six in the morning and Thomas had spent the night in his laboratory. For nearly a year he had been trying, unsuccessfully, to clone Jesus Christ. He had tried more than three hundred times. He had used eggs collected from patients of his clinic, but without success. But a month earlier he had decided to try something different, remembering what his father had said about the angel’s instructions, which specified that the blood should remain in the family and that Jesus would be reborn through the blood of his family. Perhaps the proteins found in Sarah’s eggs were different from those in other women’s eggs. Bearing this in mind, some weeks earlier Thomas had asked his daughter to come in for him to collect some eggs, and, unbelievable as it might seem in the eyes of science, Thomas had succeeded in fertilizing Sarah’s egg with the genetic material of Jesus at the first try. This was the breakthrough he needed. ‘And here I’ve been wasting all this time, because I didn´t think of this before,’ he had told himself. He was right. The cytoplasm of Sarah’s egg must have special properties that an ordinary egg didn’t have. And so the angel’s instructions that Jesus should be born of his blood and through his blood made sense now.

The fertilized egg was left to rest for a few days. Thomas fertilized more than fifty eggs, all at the first attempt. If something went wrong with the insemination, he would have other embryos. Amazingly, all the fifty eggs turned into embryos, so fifty clones of Jesus Christ could be born. The time had come for Sarah to be artificially inseminated. Thomas made his final preparations for the all-important event, the cloning of a being. If it worked out, it would be the world’s first cloning of a mammal, though in fact it would be only for him and his family, as the world wouldn’t be told about it for now. Thomas wondered if there were other clones of animals, perhaps even of human beings, loose in the world. However no one could know for sure about human clones, as the fact would involve very complex questions, both from an ethical point of view in the scientific milieu, and from the legal standpoint. Thomas probably wouldn´t be the first to risk it. He rested for some hours on the sofa in his living room before starting the insemination process. He wanted to be completely rested so that nothing should go wrong. He woke up with an aching back from the hard sofa, then went to the laboratory to wait for Sarah and finalize his preparations. He could hardly bear his own anxiety and looked at his watch about once every minute. ‘Sarah late as usual. She must be nervous, poor girl.’

Minutes later, when he was about to phone his daughter, he saw her at the end of the corridor making her way towards the laboratory. ‘Hi, Daddy, I’m here. Am I very late?’ asked Sarah, giving her father a hug and a kiss.

‘Punctual as ever,’ replied her father ironically. ‘You nervous?’

‘Just a little, but I trust you,’ answered Sarah calmly, putting her bag on the sofa.

‘Let’s get started then. Have a shower, use this antibacterial soap, then put this on,’ said Thomas, giving her a surgical gown and pointing to the door to the next room.

The doctor started the insemination procedure. Everything went smoothly. The procedure was very quick and Sarah was very happy, as she had always wanted to have a child. And now she would be the mother of Jesus, the Mary of the modern age. Sarah rested for a few days, as her father told her to. Then she began to feel changes in her body. ‘Let’s hope it isn’t just psychological,’ she thought to herself. She made an appointment to see a gynecologist, wanting to do everything by the book. She took a blood test and went back to the surgery to get the result. She opened the envelope and saw ‘HCG hormone > 150 mUI/mL.’ ‘I’m pregnant, it’s a miracle!’ Right away she called her father, from the clinic, and he answered on the first ring.

‘Daddy, I’m pregnant!’

CHAPTER 10

Washington DC, 1990

The black Jaguar stopped in front of 630 Pennsylvania Avenue. The driver and the passenger in front got out, both men wearing suits and ties and both well over six feet tall. One of them opened the back door of the Jaguar. A white-haired man of about eighty got out. While the men in suits looked carefully up and down the street, the old man took the side door into a cafeteria that was being renovated. One of the men got into the Jaguar and took off; the other followed the old man who was going down a wooden staircase. The old man came to a mahogany door. He knocked three times and a slit opened in the middle of the door to see who was knocking. The slit closed again and two seconds later the door opened. The old man and his bodyguard went through the door. They walked along a corridor for a few yards and began to go past rooms where naked women were packing cocaine in small phials. The old man reached the end of the corridor, where there was an open door.

‘What´s this shit you’re doing here? Packing cocaine right in the middle of the capital city? You really want to get locked up,’ grumbled the old man to a blond man who was sitting behind a large glass table, counting hundred-dollar notes.

‘There’s got to be some point in the pay-offs we make to the judges and the cops and anyway, we’ve got you to get us out of any trouble that comes along,’ retorted the blond man, who had a tattoo on his neck.

‘Where are the women of this whorehouse of yours, you give them a holiday?’

‘Of course not, we just moved to another place. You didn’t get the message? Our fault.’

‘Let’s get right down to business. What’ve you got for me that’s so important?’ asked the old man.

‘Mr. Jack, sit down will you? Would you like a glass of water or a cup of coffee, or something to snort?’ asked the man sarcastically.

‘Don’t joke with me, you worm, or tomorrow you’ll wake up with your mouth full of ants,’ shouted the old man.

‘Easy, Jack, I’m just kidding, no need to get all het up!’ replied the man, trying not to show he was afraid.

‘Out with it.’ The old man sat down on the sofa and took a cigar out of his jacket.

‘That Frenchman you told us to follow.’

‘I know. What about him? Did you find out anything?’

‘Yes. My people checked his phone bill and found he spent more than an hour on an international call, guess where to?’

‘Washington?’

‘Exactly!”

‘And you didn´t record the call?’

‘No, that was before we managed to bug his phone. Now it’s bugged he hasn’t made any suspicious calls.’

‘Incompetent fools! And whose phone did he call in Washington?’

‘The senator for New York.’

‘George Griffin? Are you sure?’ replied Jack, surprised.

‘Absolutely. It was his home number.’

‘But what possible connection could those two have?’ the old man thought aloud as he puffed out smoke from his cigar.

‘We don’t know yet, but you hired us to find out and we will soon know.’

‘I want to know everything about the senator. What time he gets up, what he eats, who he sleeps with apart from his wife. Bug his home phone and try to bug his office phone too.’

‘The office? That’s impossible. We’d be caught.’

‘That’s your problem. Use your secret service contacts, work it out. On second thoughts forget it, no need to bug the office. If they talked on his home phone they’re friends or something of the sort. If it was to do with work the senator would’ve used the phone in his office.’

‘You’re the boss.’

‘Send me a transcript of the important recordings. Always put the tapes in that post box I gave you. I’m off. I’ll be waiting for news.’

The old man left the room while his bodyguard, a sub-machine gun in his hand, looked the blond man up and down. The guard got a small radio out and told his colleague they were just leaving. The three got into the Jaguar and sped away. The old man, whose name wasn’t Jack, began to wonder what connection the Frenchman could have with the most popular senator in the US, his personal friend, thoughtfully running his hands through his white hair and lighting another Cuban cigar.

CHAPTER 11

Washington DC, 22nd February 1991

Senator George Griffin got home at nine p.m. His wife hadn’t arrived yet, and he thought she might be at the club gossiping with her friends, or perhaps at the house of one of them. Griffin went into the living room with his bodyguard, John, and saw that the answering machine was flashing. There were two messages. George pressed Play:

New message, recorded at 7.46 p.m.

‘Dad, you´ve no idea what I´ve found out! I analyzed the blood in the cylinder and I found something sensational. It doesn´t belong to any species known on this planet. As a matter of fact the DNA of this blood has 48 chromosomes, while human blood has 46. Isn´t it fantastic? By the way, I´ve decided to try and create the clone. Call me as soon as you get this message. Bye.’ The senator gave a start. He felt a mixture of delight at the news and alarm and remorse, for not having told Thomas not to speak of the matter over the phone. ‘Damn it,’ thought the senator, ‘my son’s very naïve.’ George pressed the button to delete the message.

New message, recorded at 8.59 p.m.

‘Hi George, this is Arnold. I’m calling to invite you for our game of golf at the club. We’ve got a lot of stuff to catch up with. Call me and we’ll fix it.’

George was surprised at his old friend’s call. It was months since they had spoken and here he was calling out of the blue for a game of golf. His billionaire friend with the white hair must be over eighty now, he would hardly be up to playing golf with George. Arnold owned banks in the US and Europe and was one of the twenty richest men in the world, according to Forbes magazine. George and Arnold were university friends; they had studied and graduated together at the Harvard Economics faculty many years before. They hadn’t seen each other for years, because both of them had very busy lives, until two years before when Arnold had resurfaced, inviting George and his wife for dinner at his house.

George picked up the phone and called his son.

‘Hallo, son.’

‘Hi, Dad, get my message?’

‘I did. Son, please don’t phone me and above all don’t leave messages about these things. We must always discuss them face to face.’

‘Ah, I understand. Sorry.’

‘We’ll talk later. Keep going on the project, I’ll be there Saturday and we’ll discuss it.’

‘OK, see you Saturday then.’

George had never spoken to Thomas so seriously and so shortly, but it was the only way he would understand the message without more explanation.

‘John, come here!’ called George to his bodyguard and butler John.

‘Yes, sir.’

‘John, I need you to check the phone lines here at home to make sure they’re not bugged. Call those people you used before.’

‘Have you heard some noise on the line? Do you suspect something?’

‘No, it’s just to put my mind at rest.’

‘Very well, consider it done.’

‘Thanks, John. I’m going up to take a bath. Ask them to make a snack for me, tell them I don’t want dinner today.’

‘Yes, sir.’

‘OK I’m going up. When Jane gets in tell her I’m in our room.’

George went upstairs. He’d call his friend another time, now he was very tired and also worried about the possibility that someone might have heard Thomas’ message.

When he reached his room he thought it better to be sure. He picked up the phone and called the kitchen extension.

‘John, one more thing: send two guards to New York and tell them to watch my son twenty-four hours a day, but without him knowing it.’

‘Yes, sir.’

John was absolutely trustworthy, having been the senator’s bodyguard for more than twenty years. He was an ex-Marine, a black belt in Brazilian ju-jitsu and aikido, as well as an expert in arms and explosives, his specialty when he was in the Marines. He was well over six feet tall and more than 260 pounds of solid muscle. He watched over the senator day and night and consequently knew all there was to know about him, including his deepest secrets. Apart from John there were another five guards or more who looked after the safety of George’s wife and their house.

‘Ask them to bring the snack to my room, I shan’t be coming down again tonight,’ said George, lying back on his bed and switching off the bedside light.

CHAPTER 12

Brazil, 31st October 2008

David was now sixteen. With his father’s help he had transformed a humble farm with a few coffee trees into a big estate. The two of them had acquired the surrounding properties and had become one of the major producers of coffee in the interior of the state of São Paulo. From the irrigation system to the administration of the business, little David (now not so little) had changed it all. He had grown into a six-foot man with the body of a male model on a magazine cover. He loved animals and had several different species on the farm, including a jaguar which had been shot and wounded and just appeared there one day. To everyone’s surprise, when David found it, it didn´t run away and it didn’t attack him. David took care of the big cat and in a few days its wounds healed.

The farm contained a large nature reserve, with many trees and waterfalls. The jaguar ran loose in this reserve, with other animals. In another part of the farm there were just dogs, which David found wandering and brought back to care for - a lot of them pedigree dogs which their owners had abandoned. The boy couldn’t understand how a human being could be capable of abandoning a pet. David loved animals so much that he persuaded the whole family to become vegetarians.

David loved to ride a horse at night and he had a small stable. He mounted his mare called Indaiá and rode up to the top of a hill. There he would watch the stars, the moon, the comets, the shooting stars, through a small telescope he had hidden in a box under some bushes. Whenever the sky was clear David would watch it for hours. It fascinated him and it seemed there was a link between him and the rest of the universe.

On a hot October night, when David was cantering through the undergrowth, he started to notice some lights coming from the forest. They were very bright lights which appeared and disappeared again.

‘Indaiá, I wonder what those lights are? Could it be someone breaking into the farm? Let’s go and see.’

David rode fast towards the lights to find out what they were, but now they seemed very far away, and at that time of night the forest was very dark. He slowed down, and went forward carefully so that the mare wouldn’t trip on the stones or fall into a hole. Minutes passed and the lights disappeared again. He got to the place where he thought he had seen them. Suddenly a large metal object loomed up, as big as a truck, with an intensely bright light shining from it. The mare reared and threw David against a tree; he hit his head and fell unconscious.

Then the floating object beamed a strong light on to him, his unconscious body began to float towards the luminous centre of the object and in a few seconds it had disappeared.

A few minutes later David woke up. Everything was white and very bright. His sight was dazzled by so much light, he was dizzy and didn´t know what was going on. ‘Have I died and gone to heaven?’ he asked himself, getting up and trying to touch something with his hands, some object or even a wall; but there was nothing.

A person approached him, wearing a skin-tight white garment. It was a man over seven feet tall who looked a little more than forty years old, with totally white hair (whiter than the whiteness around them) down to his shoulders. He said:

‘Hello, David, I hope you are feeling well.’

‘But who are you? Have I been kidnapped? Where am I? Who are you?’

‘Calm down, young man. All your questions will be answered, don’t worry. You haven’t been kidnapped, you are safe.’

‘Those lights on my farm, were they you?’

‘Yes, it was us. We used the lights to attract your attention without other people seeing.’

‘But what do you want of me?’

‘My name is Galzu. It´s an honor to meet you,’ replied the white-haired man, bowing to David.

‘Galzu? What sort of name is that? Sounds more like a nickname.’

‘It’s the name I’m known by on this planet.’

‘Now I understand. We’re on a flying saucer. I’m being abducted. My God, please don’t do anything to me,’ said David, beginning to feel frightened.

‘Yes, you’re on our ship. But please keep calm; I’m not here to do you any harm - to the contrary.’

‘But you look like a human being, how can you be an alien?’

‘Not all other races are little green men, David. There are races of all sizes and colors. Have you heard of gnomes and fairies?’

‘Of course I have, but they are just things of fiction.’

‘All fiction is inspired by something the writer witnessed or studied, like myths, which are merely fantasized portraits of something that really happened. What you on earth know as gnomes and fairies are other races which also inhabit this planet. Some live here permanently - like the gnomes, who had their own planet destroyed - in the case of the fairies they are here just to do research. Of course that’s not the real name of their race, I’m using it just to illustrate a point.’

‘I always thought that was pure fantasy, a creation of the mind of some writer. But it’s odd that a race from another planet, like your own, should be so similar to humans.’

‘David, haven’t you read the Bible? What it says in Genesis, about the creation of mankind?’

‘Of course I’ve read the Bible; my mother made me read it at least five times. It says that man was created in the image and likeness of God.’

‘And so …?’

‘Do you mean to say you’re God?’ answered David, feeling scared.

‘No. Stay calm; your questions will be answered. Just sit down now, we’ve a lot to talk about.’

David sat down in a comfortable armchair which appeared behind him as if by magic, as there hadn’t been anything there before, and began to look around him without understanding much.

‘David, before I start telling you what you need to know, there are some things I must show you, otherwise your brain will block the information I give you and refuse to believe what I’m saying. We’re going to travel back in time, to the beginning of everything, for you to see it with your own eyes. We’ll spend several months in this space-time, but when we return only a few days will have passed here. When we get back I want you to explain everything to your family. They will be worried, but we can’t take you away from here without that happening, and we haven’t got time for

explanations now.’

‘But, time travel… Is that really possible?’ David had only followed what Galzu was saying until he heard the words “travel back in time”, and then he heard no more; he just kept wondering if this was really happening to him.

‘Yes, time travel is possible. But it isn’t possible to interact with space-time. It’s as if we saw the past through a window, but without being able to go through and connect with it. The feeling you’ll get when you’re in the past will be as if you’re watching a four-dimensional film, but without being able to interact with anything. Some animals and even some humans have a certain sensitivity and can see or hear time travelers. These days you humans call these manifestations spirits or ghosts.’

‘Are you telling me that what some people see aren’t ghosts but time travelers? People who are there but are from another time?’

‘Yes, some of these apparitions are time travelers. Others can actually be from the same time, but from different, parallel universes. Some planets in other universes have a link with Earth, and some people are able to connect with them, usually in dreams. But I’ll explain all this another time. Let’s get to what matters now, our time is short. I want you to take a deep breath and close your eyes; the first time you travel you’ll probably feel nausea and may throw up.’

‘I don’t like the idea of this at all. Are you sure it’s safe? And I still didn’t understand, if we’re going to a certain moment in time, why can’t we interact with it?’

‘Let me explain in simple terms. Space-time is like a photo taken in motion. When you take a photo in motion, don’t you see a trace of the original subject which is moving? The idea here is the same: we can identify and follow one of these traces, but as time passes the older traces are wiped out. So there’s a limit to how far we can travel back in time, around a million earth years, using the energy and technology we have today. Some races are able to travel and to cross the “threshold” to interact, but they are much more highly developed than we are, beings of the highest order, which we call “the creators of everything”. Even so, they use up a huge amount of energy to do what they do.’

‘You mean to say there are beings more highly developed than you?’

‘Of course. Much more. Our race is still a comparative newcomer in this universe; there are races billions of years old.’

‘Talking of energy, there’s something I’ve always wondered about. For example, what sort of fuel do extraterrestrials use for traveling great distances and, in particular, how do they solve the question of inertia? After all, from what I’ve been learning, ETs travel at the speed of light and brake their ships in a matter of seconds or milliseconds. Inertia should make this impossible; they’d be thrown out of the ship.’

‘An excellent question, my dear boy. Now answer me this: you’re on planet Earth, traveling at sixty thousand miles an hour; if it stops, would you be thrown off?’

‘I don’t think so; Earth’s gravity wouldn’t let it happen. But there’d be many disasters.’

‘Right, well, the principle is the same. In our case, the ships possess a gravitational nucleus which gets stronger or weaker in accordance with their speed. That being so, we are subject to the laws of physics of our ships and not of the planets or other places we are in.’

‘Heavens, that’s fascinating. And tell me, what fuel do you use?’

‘We use water.’

‘Water? What do you mean, water? Water isn’t a fuel.’

‘What is water made of, David?’

‘Hydrogen and oxygen.’

‘Right. Our ships have a process for separating the hydrogen from the oxygen. Hydrogen is a powerful fuel. Have you never heard of the hydrogen bomb?’

‘It’s true, I have. I’d never thought of that.’

‘There are other races that possess energy sources much more powerful than the ones we use to get around, but they are rare in the universe.’

‘Galzu, you mentioned a race that created everything. Who are they? Are they God?’

‘From the earthlings’ point of view they would also seem like gods, but what they are is “creators of everything”, the first races that evolved billions of years ago and scattered their seeds throughout the universe. All the other races carry a trace of them in their DNA. They are the ones who run the great Intergalactic Confederation.’

‘Wait a minute, you’re telling me there’s a Confederation? This is getting to sound like Star Wars.’

‘Yes, there is. All the races beyond a certain level of importance are part of the Confederation, and those of the highest importance preside over it. The Confederation makes intergalactic laws, and oversees and protects less developed races and planets. If it didn’t exist, Earth would by now have been destroyed by other races. We, from the planet Nibiru, are responsible for Earth and we protect it with the Confederation’s help.’

‘Earth, destroyed? Why would anyone want to do that?’

‘For various reasons. Some races would have come to Earth, used up all its natural resources and then gone on to other planets. This happens a lot with planets which have no protection and no intelligent race.’

‘Goodness, I’m impressed. Do you think I could visit the Confederation?’

‘You will meet them soon, and much more. Now let’s get to what really matters, our travel through time.’

Then Galzu, with the help of two other crew members, began to program the ship’s computers for the time travel. Seconds later everything went out, the ship went black, and lights began to wink. David’s head began to go in circles. In the distance they heard a sound like an explosion. Suddenly, the whiteness returned and, as Galzu had predicted, David felt dizzy and began to throw up, kneeling on the ground.

CHAPTER 13

Earth, approx. 440000 BC

Galzu and David exited the ship through a doorway and immediately they were on firm ground. The place was uninhabited, full of trees, some lakes and swampland. Galzu pointed out to David a brilliant star in the sky which could be seen on the horizon, even though it was daytime.

A great ship from the planet Nibiru was nearing Earth. Alalu was on it.

Galzu began explaining to David that the star was in fact a spaceship, that it would land near them, and began to speak of the one who piloted it.

‘David, the ship you will see landing carried Alalu. King of Nibiru, he was dethroned by Anu. Alalu had seized the throne of Nibiru. He killed king Lahma and proclaimed himself sovereign. Years later, prince Anu challenged Alalu to a fight for control of the planet. Anu won the fight and became king. In all the confusion, after his defeat before all the people, Alalu managed to escape. He was afraid of being killed like Lahma. He stole one of the royal ships, armed with a variety of weapons, sat himself in the pilot’s seat and took off. After many adventures in space, Alalu caught sight of the planet Earth. He disconnected the long-distance turbines and began to fly round the earth reconnoitering, studying the atmosphere and making other analyses. His ship loosed a ray which penetrated the atmosphere and swept over the planet’s main regions. It detected a great quantity of gold under the earth and in the water. Alalu was delighted at the discovery. He took a decision: he would land on that planet, even though he was afraid, since the atmosphere was very hot and the ship might not survive the descent. The ship began to shake and groan loudly in protest as it passed through the earth’s atmosphere, but in a few seconds it was near the ground. It was almost impossible to stop the ship, which fell into a swamp. Alalu lost consciousness, and when he came to he was totally disoriented, almost in a state of shock. He opened his eyes and realized that he had survived, and that the ship was practically intact. He had landed on the planet of gold.’

Alalu put on his protective suit, the door opened and he stepped down on to the earth. The ground was dark and the sky was white and blue. The silence was almost complete; he could hardly hear any sounds. There was no one there; he was alone. On the horizon he saw great hills, all around him there was vegetation. The ground was swampy, his feet sank in easily, and it was very cold. After a few hours exploring the place he returned to the ship to rest and eat.

David and Galzu followed Alalu’s every step.

After he woke up again Alalu saw everything very clearly: it was day, and the brightness was unbearable - he had never seen anything like it on Nibiru. Next he programmed the onboard computer to test the oxygen and the water on the planet. He sent a probe out of the ship and, after testing the oxygen and confirming there were no poisonous gases, Alalu risked taking off his protective suit. He went out of the ship again and took a deep breath. He was pleased he could breathe normally. The brightness was such that it hurt Alalu’s eyes, and he went back to the ship to get a dark eye-shade. He began to walk across the mud; the water was dark and greenish, the edges of the swamp were full of stones. Alalu took a stone from the ground and threw it into the water; as it hit he could see the movement of fish. He sent a probe into the water and discovered to his disappointment that it wasn’t drinkable. He continued to walk, reached the dry land and went towards the hills, past trees, undergrowth, bushes. The trees were full of colorful fruits of various shapes. He picked one of the fruits and tried it without hesitation. It had a sweet taste. As he journeyed Alalu tried to protect himself from the sun’s rays. He began to feel dampness in the ground and realized he was near water. From afar he saw a lake, went up to it and tested the water with his probe. The probe confirmed that the water was good to drink. Alalu was overjoyed. There was oxygen, water, fish, fruit, everything was perfect; and what was more there was gold, an essential metal for the survival of his planet. When he tried the water he found that it had a different taste from the water on Nibiru. While he was drinking he began to hear sounds. He turned round and was alarmed to see a body sliding along the edge of the lake. He took out his weapon and fired a shot. He ran up to see what it was. The creature was dead. Its body was like a very long rope, it had no hands or feet and the eyes were very strange, as if it was a fierce animal. It frightened him. He filled a container with water and ran back to his ship. The sun was going down and by the time he arrived it was dark.

‘How strange, the day’s very short here, not at all like Nibiru,’ said Alalu, watching the moon and the planets brightening in the sky.

Alalu was worried: he needed to find large amounts of gold, on which his planet depended. Nibiru’s atmosphere needed the metal to protect itself, since the gold served as a sort of force-field to filter and block radiation from the cosmos, as well as protecting the planet from excessive heat and cold.

As soon as dawn came, Alalu left the ship with his probe and went to look for gold. He went to the swamps and passed the probe through the water, anxiously awaiting a positive result. The probe indicated the components in the water: oxygen, hydrogen, organic material and, finally, gold. The probe confirmed the presence of gold in the water. Alalu could hardly contain his delight.

‘The people of Nibiru will be very pleased with my discovery, they’ll be proud of me and I’ll get my throne back,’ said Alalu, hurrying back to the ship.

He sat in the captain’s seat and gave orders for the ship’s computer to link up with Nibiru. He was euphoric and needed to give his people the news. When he was connected he started to talk to Anu, the king of Nibiru:

‘Anu, the fate of Nibiru is in my hands. I want you to listen very carefully to what I have to say. I’m on another planet and I’ve discovered gold.’

‘But how is it possible you’ve succeeded in getting to another planet on your own? What planet is it?’ replied Anu, thinking this was another of Alalu’s tricks.

‘I have reached the seventh planet beyond the asteroid belt. I am close to the big yellow star. It’s a small blue planet.’

‘And how much gold have you found?’

‘I’m not sure yet how much exactly, as I’ve only analyzed a few areas, but the probe confirmed the presence of gold in most

of them.’

‘Alalu, I am pleased at the news. I’ll call a general assembly straight away to decide on an expedition to this planet. Please keep me informed, in spite of everything.’

King Anu, his counselors and all the people of Nibiru were amazed at the news and at the fact that Alalu was still alive. How could he be alive in another world?

Anu immediately called a meeting of the counselors of Nibiru.

‘Call together the commanders of Nibiru. We must send an expedition to this blue planet as soon as possible. Alalu has found gold. Our planet will be saved.’

Alalu was present at the assembly through a video link, and then he replied:

‘Let all the princes present declare my royal supremacy. Let the commanders of Nibiru choose me as their leader. Let the royal counselors appoint me king in Anu’s place.’

All of them were surprised at Alalu’s words. How could they depose Anu? And what if Alalu was lying about the gold he said he had found?

The counselors cut the video link and started discussing the matter among themselves. Then Anu’s son, Enlil, spoke:

‘Alalu is in no position to ask for anything. He lost the battle with my father and so he lost the throne. He should honor what has already been decided. Maybe he has found gold, but who can guarantee it will be enough for our atmosphere?’

The counselors resumed the conference with Alalu and asked him about the truth of his find, calling for proof. Then Alalu took a crystal from his probe and inserted it in the ship’s computer, which transmitted the information to Nibiru.

‘See for yourselves the data from my probe: data which, as you know, it is impossible to manipulate. Now that I have proved what I told you before, declare me king,’ demanded Alalu angrily.

They cut the conference with Alalu again and Anu’s other son, the prince Ea, stood up and began to speak to the assembly:

‘Let me go to the blue planet to bring back gold to Nibiru. When I get there I’ll calm Alalu down - after all, he is my stepfather - and we’ll proclaim him king of the blue planet. If Nibiru is saved by the gold, we’ll have another fight between my birth father Anu and Alalu. Who wins will keep the throne of Nibiru,’ said Ea, referring to the fact that Alalu had married his mother.

Everyone listened to Ea’s wise words with admiration. This seemed a good solution to the conflict.

‘So let it be!’ declared Anu before the assembly. ‘Let my son leave for earth and if Nibiru is saved, I will fight Alalu again and the victor will be king.’

The counselors informed Alalu of the decision via the video link.

Although Alalu could not see all that was going on at the assembly, David and Galzu could see what was happening on a small crystal screen which Galzu had.

‘David, Alalu couldn’t see everything that happened at the assembly in Nibiru, as they blocked him when it was convenient. I have the complete record of the meeting in my crystal and what you are seeing happened at the very same instant, but on the planet Nibiru. I’ll run it forward a little for you to see what happened some time later, when the commanders of Nibiru and Ea set off for Earth.’

By the video link Alalu was informed of the decision. He was Ea’s stepfather and Anu was Ea’s real father. So Ea would be an important intermediary in the conflict.

‘Let my stepson Ea come to this planet. I accept the challenge of another fight, but first we will save Nibiru with my discovery, and may this be recorded in the royal archives of Nibiru.’

After the assembly, preparations began for the great journey. It took a long time for everything to be organized. Several commanders were summoned. The astronomers of Nibiru began to calculate the best moment for the ships to depart for the blue planet.

The departure day had arrived. A crowd gathered where the ships of Nibiru were located. They had gone to say farewell to the crew that would return with the salvation of the planet. The crew started to embark, wearing their spacesuits. The last to embark was Ea, who first kneeled down before his father Anu. Anu wished him luck.

‘My son, a great responsibility rests on your shoulders. You will make a long journey. Go, and return alive, and bring back with you the salvation of our planet.’

Ea’s mother embraced him. Ea said goodbye to his wife and then to his brother Enlil.

With great sadness, but also great joy, Ea went up into the ship and gave the order for departure.

Anzu was the commander of the ship that Ea was in. He was a skilled pilot. He lifted off and they set off towards the distant sun.

David and Galzu watched the events unfold and then went through the door back into their ship.

CHAPTER 14

Galzu and David were back in their ship. David was a bit confused at all that he had seen, heard and felt. Everything was very surreal. It seemed like a dream, but it was all too real to be a dream.

‘David, I know you’re full of questions and doubts about all we’ve seen. But before I answer, I’m going to show you another point in time, some thousands of years later than the time we’ve just been watching. Now there are many Anunnaki on Earth, they have built cities and they are lords of the earth.’

‘Galzu, could I rest a little now? This journey has been very tiring.’

‘Of course, David. I’m sorry, I forget that your mind and body aren’t used to this sort of voyage.’

David lay down in a chair and slept for several hours. He awoke very hungry. Right away he saw near him a table covered with fruits and other delicacies. He began to eat, and when he had finished Galzu appeared again.

‘Hello, David, are you rested? Ready for another journey?’

‘Yes, now I am, let’s go. But first there’s something I must know: why are you showing me all this? Why me and not someone else? What’s the purpose of all this? I’m a simple farmer’s son.’

‘David, you are more special than you think. Let me just take you on one more journey. When we get back some of your questions will have been answered, and I will explain the rest to you.’

Once again everything went black and they heard a great noise. Everything turned bright again and Galzu took David’s hand and went towards the door. This time David wasn’t sick, his mind and body had got used to it.

As they went through the doorway they saw a small city, with many beautiful houses of marble and a sort of palace in the distance.

Galzu and David walked to the palace, went up a stairway of pink marble and reached the main entrance, which was open. They went into the palace. At the back they saw a number of Anunnakis conversing.

‘David, this is Ea, who is now called Enki, and Ninurta, son of Enlil. Enlil himself, Enki’s brother, is over there on the left. The two brothers are the lords of the earth.’

David and Galzu went closer to hear the conversation.

‘Father, uncle, I’ve come to give you an alarming piece of news.’

‘Tell me, Ninurta, what is troubling you.’

‘Our stock of gold is rapidly running out. Soon we shall have no more to send to Nibiru.’

‘But that’s impossible! Our analyses show that there is gold for many shars,’ said Enlil angrily, not believing what he was hearing. ‘Son, go to Badtibira and find out what is happening. Take your ship and leave at once.’

‘Nephew, as soon as you discover something let us know at once,’ said Enki anxiously.

Ninurta called two of his soldiers, went up into the ship and set off for Badtibira, the place where the gold was mined.

When they landed the officer in charge, Ennugi, greeted them.

‘Welcome, Ninurta, it’s an honor to have you here.’

‘Ennugi, I have been sent by my father and my uncle to find out why we are sending so little gold to Nibiru.’

‘Ninurta, I was going to tell you about the problem. Our brothers are unhappy with the work, they are tired and they miss their homes. The work is endless and they haven’t been relieved for a long time. They feel like slaves, while others get married and start families and live like kings on earth. They are fed up; I try to calm them down, but the situation is getting out of control. The sun is very hot, and they’re not used to such heat.’

‘Ennugi, I understand our brothers’ situation. I’ll talk to Enlil and Enki immediately and arrange for relief workers. Please ask them to go back to work and tell them they’ll soon be returning to Nibiru.’

Ninurta went back to the ship and returned to the palace. He was anxious and concerned at how his father and uncle would react. When he entered the palace he went to speak to Enki.

‘Uncle, the news is not good. The workers are no longer happy with the work. They feel like slaves. They can no longer stand the heat and they don’t want to go on working while others live like kings.’

‘Ninurta, tell your father at once. Ask him to go to the mines to see this at first hand.’

Ninurta called his father on a communicator and gave him the news.

‘You mean they are rebelling against us?’

‘Not against us, father, but against the excess of work.’

‘I’m going there at once. I want to see this with my own eyes.’

Enlil and his soldiers flew to Badtibira. On arrival they were met by Ennugi.

‘Ennugi, I want to know what’s happening here.’

‘My lord, as I explained to Ninurta, the workers are rebelling, it won’t take long for a war to break out. They don’t want to work any more, they’ve had enough.’

‘Ennugi, go to the mines and bring back some representatives of the workers. I want to talk to them.’

Ennugi hurried to the mines to choose two representatives of the workers. They had seen that Enlil was there and they had made a plan. When Ennugi was least expecting it the Anunnakis grabbed him and bound him with cords of iron. They took their tools, set fire to the tips and set off for the house where Enlil was. They surrounded the house, all of them with torches and tools in their hands. Now it was night. Kalkal sealed the entrance to the house, then hurried to Enlil to tell him what had happened.

‘My lord, our brother Anunnakis have gone mad, they want to break into the house with tools and fire.’

‘This is unbelievable. They’re rebelling against me? How dare they?’

Enlil went to the window and shouted to the rebels:

‘Which of you is the leader of this mutiny? Who is behind it?’

‘We are all here of our own accord. Each one of us said “Enough!’ for himself. We won’t work as slaves any longer.’

Enlil went back to his rooms and contacted Nibiru.

‘I must speak to my father Anu.’

‘Son, what is happening? Why are you so distressed?’

‘Father, the workers have revolted, they refuse to work any more and they are threatening me with fire.’

‘What are they accusing you of?’

Enki joined the conference.

‘Father, they are not accusing Enlil, but they are complaining of too much work.’

‘The work must go on, or our planet will perish.’

Enki’s ship landed near the house where Enlil was. Heavily-armed soldiers ran towards the rebellious workers. Enki followed them and announced:

‘My brothers, put down your torches. Let’s discuss this in a civilized manner. I promise I will resolve your problems. Let Ennugi go at once, he can be your representative before our assembly.’

The workers freed Ennugi and laid down their torches and the tools they were intending to use as weapons. They were afraid of being killed by Enki’s soldiers and at the same time, they trusted his words and obeyed his orders.

Enki, Enlil, Ennugi and Ninurta discussed the situation.

‘Let the rebels return to Nibiru and we will recruit new workers to take their place on Earth,’ said Ninurta.

‘Can’t we create new more powerful tools that don’t require manual labor?’ Enlil asked Enki.

‘Call my son Ningishzidda, I want him to advise us about this, he’s the expert in the matter of tools and machines,’ replied Enki.

At once Ningishzidda flew from the House of Life, as they called Enki’s palace, to the mines. When he arrived they conversed a little but failed to reach an agreement.

‘Now that the workers are calmer, waiting for the return trip to Nibiru and the arrival of new workers, we can go back to the House of Life. Let’s return there and call a meeting of the whole family tomorrow morning. I’ve had and idea that could resolve our problem,’ said the son of Enki.

In the morning all the family members gathered in the house of life for an assembly with Anu by video link to Nibiru.

Then Ningishzidda spoke:

‘I have an idea to resolve the problem of the workers. We’ll create an earthborn worker that will carry out the hardest work.’

The whole assembly was amazed and at a loss for words. They began to talk among themselves. They had never heard of a being that could be created from nothing, intelligent enough to take orders and carry them out. Ninmah, a woman who was expert in scientific matters, answered him:

‘Brother, how are we going to make something of this sort? All beings are descended from a seed and evolve with the passage of time. We have never heard of a being created from nothing.’

‘You are right, sister. But let me tell you a secret. The being we require already exists. It’s an animal that walks on two legs and hides in the forests of Abzu; I have seen it several times with my own eyes. Its body is hairy, it uses its arms to hang from, it drinks from the rivers like a gazelle; it wears no clothes and has little intelligence, but we can modify its genetic code, mixing it with ours, and create a worker strong and intelligent enough to take and carry out our orders.’

‘Enki, we have confidence in you and your scientific ability. No one can know better than you if this can work or not. So I authorize you to go ahead with your plan and create a terrestrial worker to take the place of our exhausted brothers,’ said Anu to Enki, before the whole assembly.

Then Enlil replied:

‘Father, we cannot do this, it’s against the laws of the universe. A creator of everything already exists, the most ancient race in the universe, which created the other races. Only it can create a new race. I don’t agree with Enki. And we have never seen a creature like this here on Edin.’

‘This morning before the assembly, my soldiers went to the prairies of Edin and captured two specimens, a male and a female. Come in and bring the creatures in the cage,’ Enkin ordered the soldiers through his communicator.

The soldiers came into the area where the assembly was taking place, pushing a strong cage made of iron. When they saw Enki and the others, the animals started to jump up and down and to struggle, beating at the bars of the cage and grunting desperately, trying to escape. After a while they realized they were achieving nothing and they stopped and calmed down.

‘See for yourselves. These are the animals we can use as the basis for our experiment.’

All of them were stunned, marveling at the creatures. Then Ningishzidda took an instrument and pierced the hand of one of the creatures, which jumped back in fright. The instrument was a DNA reader. The reading was done and

Ningishzidda said:

‘It’s amazing; their DNA is very similar to ours. This experiment will probably work, we will just have to make some adjustments in the DNA, but it will take some time.’

‘I can’t agree with this, we abolished slavery on Nibiru long ago, and we can’t just reintroduce it here on earth,’ said Enlil angrily.

‘Brother, we don’t want slaves, we want helpers. They will be paid for their work. And it isn’t about creating a new being, we will just perfect a creature that already exists, helping in its evolution,’ replied Enki persuasively, and Ninmah argued in his favor:

‘We too are the evolution of another species. If the creators of everything made us in this way and we have the wisdom and the capacity to do the same, I don’t see a problem. I think we are destined to this: to scatter our seed throughout the universe.’

‘My children, let me take the matter to the council here in Nibiru, and I’ll get back to you soon with a decision,’ said Anu.

After a long discussion between the council and Anu, it was decided:

‘If this is the only way for us to bring gold to Nibiru, and if our survival is at stake, then let us put aside the laws of the Intergalactic Confederation and create a terrestrial worker. Let us save Nibiru,’ announced Anu, transmitting the decision to Earth.

Enki was very pleased at the decision and chose Ninmah to assist him with the experiments, as she was very knowledgeable about medicine.

‘Ennugi, communicate the decision to the workers at Abzu. Tell them to go back to work and wait for us to create the being.’

The Anunnaki workers were disappointed. They didn’t revolt again, but they went back to work with little enthusiasm.

After a long time studying, analyzing and documenting the matter, Enki said:

‘Let us take the semen of an Anunnaki and inseminate the female biped. We’ll see how the combination results.’

When they made the attempt, after a few days they concluded that there had been no fertilization.

‘We’ll have to find another way,’ said Ninmah to Enki.

Ninmah took a crystal container and in it she placed an egg from the female biped and Anunnaki semen. She mixed them carefully and succeeded in fertilizing the egg. She implanted the fertilized egg in the female biped and, after several earth months, the new species was ready to be born. They were all anxious about the result, but the female couldn’t deliver her offspring. So Ninmah made a cut in her abdomen and pulled the being out of her womb. It was alive, in Ninmah’s hands, but something seemed strange about its face. When they washed the newly-born they saw that it had hair over almost the whole of its body, and its face was hairy, except for the lower part of it.

They gave the newly-born to the female to care for and feed. After some time, it had grown in size, but its hand did not adapt itself to the tools, it could not hold objects securely and it only grunted, unable to communicate.

‘We must try again, brother. We’ll modify the Anunnaki semen before fertilizing the egg.’

They repeated all the procedures, adjusting the DNA, and once again they fertilized the egg and implanted it. This time the newly-born was more like the Anunnakis, and again they gave it to the female to breast-feed. When it grew, they saw that its hands were adapted to hold tools; and it was more attractive, not so like the bipeds. But as they carried out tests on the child they saw that all was not as it should be, and that its sight was cloudy. All the beings were born with some defect: liver problems, short arms, inadequate lungs. Ninmah and Enki were almost giving up when they decided to change the method.

‘There’s only one thing we haven’t tried. We always inseminate the female biped, we have never used the womb of a female Anunnaki,’ said the scientist, deep in thought.

‘But brother, how are we going to find an Anunnaki woman prepared for an experiment that could produce a monster or something similar?’

‘Let me speak to my wife Ninki. I’m sure she’ll help us and lend us her womb.’

‘No, brother, I’ve been with you since we started these experiments, and it’s I who should take the risk, not your wife. Let me carry the child in my womb.’

Enki was surprised at his sister’s reaction. He embraced her and said;

‘So be it. I hope you are sure of what you are doing.’

After the preparations, they fertilized an egg and implanted it in Ninmah. After nine earth months she gave birth to a male, a little boy. Enki took him in his hands, he was perfect. He smacked his bottom and the child began to cry. It was the cry of an Anunnaki child and not of a biped pup. They were all very happy. Ninmah began to cry with joy.

The scientists began to examine the child. All its members, bones, blood, ears, eyes - they examined it from head to toe. Everything appeared to be perfect; the being wasn’t hairy, its hair was black, its skin was red and its blood dark red. When they examined the genitals they noted that its penis was covered with skin which grew past the end of the organ, hanging there, which was not like the penis of the Anunnaki boys.

‘Let the terrestrial be differentiated from us Anunnakis by this skin,’ said Enki.

The child began to cry loudly, it was hungry. Then Ninmah put it on her lap and gave it a breast to suckle.

‘What shall we call the child? After all, it’s a terrestrial born of us, and not just any creature,’ asked Enki.

‘We’ll call him Adamu, which means “like the clay of the Earth”. That will be his name.’

‘Let them make Adamu a cradle. He shall stay in the House of Life with us,’ commanded Enki.

‘Ninmah, now we must create an army of beings like Adamu. That could take a long time,’ Ningishzidda reminded them.

‘You’re right. We’ll use Adamu as a model for all the others. Adamu will be spared hard work to serve as our model,’ replied Enki.

‘But what wombs shall we use to carry the seed?’

Ninmah thought for a moment and then replied:

‘We will call some Anunnakis from the city of Shurubak; they always help me with cures and sometimes with childbirth. I am sure some of them will accept the challenge. Have them brought here and we will show them Adamu; I’m certain they will be amazed at the child and I feel they will help us.’

A ship left for the place where the women lived who Ninmah wanted to recruit.

‘The Lord Enki requires your presence at the House of Life immediately, board now,’ announced the ship’s loudspeaker, hovering over the homes of the Anunnakis.

They flew back to the House of Life and were received like princesses. When they came to Ninmah’s quarters, she said:

‘Sisters, I want to show you the terrestrial worker who was born from my womb. He is the first of an army of workers we will create to work in the mines and extract the precious gold that will save our planet. I want to ask you a great favor. I don’t want to oblige any of you to accept, it will be for each of you to decide, but the success of this project depends on you. We need volunteers to carry these earthlings in their wombs.’

The Anunnakis looked at each other and seven of them stepped forward, accepting the challenge.

‘Very good, I am most grateful to all of you. May your names be remembered for ever.’

Each one of them gave her name:

‘Ninimma.’

‘Shuzianna.’

‘Ningunna.’

‘Musardu.’

‘Ninmug.’

‘Ninbara.’

‘Ninmada.’

After a few days the preparations for the inseminations began. The Anunnakis were installed in special quarters. More eggs were collected from the female biped and they made a small cut in Adamu’s penis. A drop of blood fell and they used it to fertilize the eggs with the essence of the new being. All of them would be his clones. The fertilized eggs were implanted in the Anunnaki women. Nine earth months passed and all the women gave birth to exact copies of Adamu.

‘Let them make seven more workers,’ said Ningishzidda.

‘Son,’ said Enki, ‘in this way we are not going to succeed in making an army of workers; we’ll take a very long time to get to a sufficient number, and we do not have much time. We must make females to reproduce. I will call my wife Ninki to carry a terrestrial female in her womb.’

They explained to Ninki what was happening, and spoke of how her help was needed. The woman was fascinated with what was going on and accepted the challenge at once. Then they began the work of fertilizing the egg which would become the female earthling. After making all the adjustments they implanted the fertilized seed in Ninki’s womb. When the gestation period was over the time came for the female earthling to be born. But something was wrong; the child was not being delivered. They waited for another month and then Ninmah cut Ninki open so that she should give birth to the female earthling. The child was born and they were all happy. They examined the fragile earthling child carefully - everything was satisfactory, limbs, eyes, it wasn’t hairy, its hair was the color of the sands of the sea and its skin was the color and textures of the Anunnakis’. The sounds it made were the sounds they expected to hear, appropriate for an Anunnaki child. They gave the child to Ninki to breastfeed. They gave it the name Tiamat, which means “mother of life”: the same name as the ancient planet which became the Earth and the moon. The gestation of seven new female earthlings, which would be paired with the seven males, was started at once. They took the essence of Tiamat, fertilized eggs from female bipeds with it and inseminated the Anunnaki women. They waited for the prescribed time and then the seven females were born, who in turn gave birth, forming an army of workers. When the children reached a certain age, they put all of them in the forests to grow up together

and multiply.

‘Let Adamu and Tiamat be spared from hard work. Let them be taken to Edin, so that all the Anunnakis may know the new species we have created to save our planet,’ declared Enki.

Adamu and Tiamat were taken to Edin. A house was built for them to live in. All the people went to Edin to see the novelty; even Enlil, in spite of himself, went to see the creatures, and when he saw them he became less opposed to the whole idea. Marduk, son of Enki, and the great majority of his soldiers left the planet Mars especially to see the new beings. They were amazed and impressed at what Enki and Ninmah had created.

After some time, the children were grown up and totally developed. The process was very rapid on earth, in contrast to Nibiru. When they reached maturity the creatures began to couple among themselves. At first, however, the Anunnakis noticed that the females did not become pregnant, and realized that without this it would be impossible to create the workforce that they so badly needed. The Anunnakis working in the mines were tired of waiting and Enki was afraid they would revolt if they knew that the new beings were not procreating. ‘We have created a curse,’ though Enki to himself, almost regretting what they had done.

‘Don’t lose heart, Enki. We’ll analyze the DNA of these creatures and we’ll find a solution very shortly,’ mused Ningishzidda.

Analyzing the creatures’ DNA they noted that it had only twenty-two pairs of chromosomes. The twenty-third pair, which was directly responsible for the ability to procreate and which the Anunnakis possessed, was absent in the creatures. Ningishzidda took Ninmah, Enki, Adamu and Tiamat to an isolated laboratory. Ningishzidda made them all lie down on beds, gave them a general anesthetic and waited till they all fell asleep. He drew from Enki the vital essence that was lacking in the new males and injected it into Adamu. He injected the vital feminine essence from Ninmah into Tiamat. After some hours they all awoke. The missing pair of chromosomes had been successfully implanted in Adamu and Tiamat. Now they could procreate normally.

‘We’ll let them roam free in Edin, get to know each other and couple. We will just observe from afar,’ said Ninmah.

Some time later Enlil was walking through Edin to escape the heat and met Adamu and Tiamat with clothing covering their intimate parts. This seemed odd, as the creatures went about naked without any shame, quite unconscious of their nudity. Enlil went to Enki and asked for an immediate explanation. Enki explained to Enlil that the experiment had failed, and that the pair of chromosomes needed for the creatures to procreate was missing. Enlil was furious when he knew that Enki had given the creatures one more Anunnaki characteristic. He thought that Enki had given them the gene for long life, which allowed the Anunnakis to live for thousands of years. Enki explained to Enlil that he had not given them this gene, and that the operation had been simply to make them capable of procreating, for otherwise there would be no workers for the gold mines. Nibiru’s fate depended on this experiment. If it didn’t work out, the Anunnakis working in the mines would rebel and all the effort so far put into calming them down would be wasted. Enlil accepted the argument, but he was still angry and exclaimed:

‘Let them procreate far from Edin. This isn’t their place. We cannot mix with an inferior race, even if we created it. Let them be expelled from Edin and go to Abzu, far from here.’

Enki carried out his brother’s wishes. In time, Adamu and Tiamat succeeded in procreating, and Tiamat fell pregnant. The leaders of the Anunnakis went to Abzu to witness the birth, which was a historic event. In the green grassland Tiamat gave birth to twins, a son and a daughter, the first descendants of the earthlings. Everyone was amazed to see how rapidly the children grew, developing with an incredible speed compared to Anunnaki standards. The days were like months and the months grew into years and more years for the earth. In time Adamu and Tiamat had more sons and daughters, and the twins too coupled and procreated; the earthlings proliferated very rapidly.

The earthlings adapted themselves totally to the climate of the earth. They didn’t complain about the excessive heat, let alone about the dust. They understood all the orders the Anunnakis gave them and regarded them as their true creators, as gods. The Anunnakis no longer needed to work in the mines, since the earthlings took over that function and didn’t complain. They worked hard from dawn to dusk to please their creators. The desire to please was stronger than any fatigue. Gold was arriving in abundance in Nibiru. Everything was going well; the Anunnakis put down roots on the planet Earth. They too were procreating, having earth-born sons and daughters with Anunnaki blood. But the earth began to change. Volcanoes started to erupt. The icecaps at the poles began to melt; the planet was altering. Marduk sent news from Mars to his father Enki, informing him of changes in the planet and of very strong gales. Something was happening, something that would change the destiny of planet Earth and of its old and new inhabitants.

CHAPTER 15

David and Galzu returned once more from their voyage in time. These journeys were very tiring for anyone not used to them. David was exhausted, practically fainting with tiredness. Back at the ship, Galzu’s soldiers gave David water and fruit to build up his energy. He devoured the fruit as if it was his first meal in years. In fact they had spent more than three days traveling in space-time. David was very confused by this mixture of dream and real life. It was very strange for him, and his head was full of questions.

After some hours of sleep David woke up and went walking through the ship. It was enormous, like a steel labyrinth. Part of its surface was covered in a gilded metal, with inscriptions in silver, like the inscriptions he had seen on pyramids, and even like the marks that appeared in plantations. Apart from the gold and silver, a sort of crystal was used in some of the ship’s structures. Apparently all the circuitry was made of this crystal, which had many colored lights passing through it. David walked a little further and reached a compartment which appeared to be the control room. At the rear, seated on a chair, was Galzu. The control panel was immense, with many crystals and many lights, like nothing David had ever seen before, not even in science fiction films. It was beautiful. Galzu, facing the panel and without turning round, felt David’s presence.

‘Hi, David, come over here! I hope you’re rested.’

‘How did you know I was here?’

‘We have presence sensors in the ship. Each of these lights represents a member of our crew.’

‘There are a lot of lights.’

‘Yes, there are 350351 of us, including you.’

‘Galzu, that trip of ours… It wasn’t a dream, was it?’

‘Of course it wasn’t! Please, sit here at my side; I think you’re bursting with questions.’

‘Yes I am - I’ve got so many doubts my head is hurting.’

‘Well ask away, that’s what I’m here for: to serve you and to pass on knowledge.’

‘Galzu, as far as I can understand, what till now I knew as God, the creator of the heavens and the earth and the creator of mankind, in reality, all along, was your people?’

‘Exactly right.’

‘So does that mean that God doesn’t exist?’

‘That depends on your concept of God.’

‘For me, God is a superior being, very powerful, and the creator of the universe.’

‘David, tell me this: how could a single being be the creator of the universe? And if this was the case, who created this being?’

‘Good question, I’ve always asked myself the same thing. But my mother told me it was a sin to entertain that sort of doubt about God.’

‘In fact it would be impossible for a single being to create a real world. We can create a virtual world and people it with beings possessing artificial intelligence, but it would be an environment created in a computer, which wouldn’t really exist. The universe has existed for billions of years, even we don’t know how it really came into being, the superior races haven’t given us this knowledge yet. Our theory is the one we taught you, that the universe was smaller than an atom and expanded as time passed. Some studies indicate that our universe is the mirror image of another one. It’s as if our universe had got to the limit of its expansion and then turned back on itself, forming a previously non-existent parallel universe, continuing to expand in this way. The multiverses interact: one universe interferes in another one with a parallel dimension.’

‘Do you mean to say it was you who taught us what we know of the universe?’

‘Yes, a good part of human knowledge was passed on to you by us, otherwise you’d still be living in the tenth century. Many technological advances and cures for disease were achieved with our help and that of some other races that visit the earth.’

‘I understand. But to get back to God: if he doesn’t exist, who created your race, before you created ours?’

‘Our race was created by another one superior to us. They are beings of the highest order, who have existed for more than two billion years, so they are highly evolved. In fact they didn’t create us, they transformed us, as we did with you: they took an existing race and subjected it to genetic modification, allowing it to take a great evolutionary leap.’

‘You mean evolution exists?’

‘Yes it does, but it’s very slow. A superior race can always give evolution a little push, shall we say.’

‘So it’s true that man came from the monkey. From what I could understand, you altered the DNA of another race, mixed it with yours and created us.’

‘The being you evolved from is known on earth as Homo habilis. First we created the Homo erectus, using part of our DNA. Then we crossed Homo erectus with our race. From this cross arose what you know as Neanderthal Man. After several more crosses and some genetic modifications, we arrived at Homo sapiens, or the human race. Have you never wondered how Homo habilis evolved so quickly into Homo erectus? The missing link, the link between these races, which has been looked for and researched so deeply, is nothing more than a genetic modification which today human beings are capable of carrying out. And there’s more: what is today known as Homo sapiens sapiens was genetically modified a few hundred years ago, so today’s human being is much more highly evolved than the first Homo sapiens.’

‘Truly, now it all makes sense. But why don’t you reveal this, instead of letting us live a lie? In fact you just created us to use us as slaves.’

‘David, humanity isn’t ready for this information yet. If it became known, all belief in God would be extinguished and there would be chaos in the world. Our research shows us that a good part of humankind only keeps, let’s say, to the straight and narrow, for fear of breaking some divine law. If these people were convinced that creation didn’t happen as they imagine now and that God, in truth, is a being from another planet, we don’t know what might happen. That’s why we are making an effort to give man the necessary basis in knowledge, so that there won’t be chaos. It will be one of your missions to reveal the truth, and the moment is near. As far as slavery goes, I can tell you it was mainly in the mind, since the primitive humans worked from a spontaneous free will, as a tribute to us their creators. We never forced them to work and in exchange they received much knowledge - without which the human race would not have evolved till now.’

‘I understand. You passed for gods, for angels, all that time, deceiving us.’

‘David, in the old days humanity only obeyed and behaved reasonably well when the god gave orders. If we had let humankind do what it wanted to, without a God to intervene, it would have torn itself apart. Let me tell you a story. There was a time when humans no longer obeyed the gods. They did what they wanted, when they wanted. The result of this was the death of thousands of innocent people, disease, killing, war, hunger. Anu the king of Nibiru and his son Enlil were set on doing away with humanity. This was necessary another time too. Thousands of years ago, our planet Nibiru was very close to Earth. Nibiru’s magnetic field caused a massive interference in your planet and the poles were inverted. Huge icebergs began to melt and that is when what you know as the Flood took place. Mankind was going to be wiped out, but I was given orders to intervene. Not from Anu, our king, but from the beings who created us. They came to me and said that, since humanity had been created, it should be preserved. They are opposed to the extinction of races, however bad they may be. They prefer to work towards converting these races to the good. This way, with Enki’s help, the son of Anu, we were able to save part of humanity through the one you know today as Noah.’

‘You mean it wasn’t God who sent the flood? It would have happened one way or another?’

‘Right. It was inevitable. And thousands of years later, humanity returned to the way it was. This time the extinction would be deliberate, as Enlil, who was always opposed to the creation of the humans, wanted to destroy them with a lethal virus. Once again Enki intervened and saved them. But I’ll show you this story so that you understand it properly. We’ll go back in time to the moment when this decision was taken. And that’s where you come in - this way you’ll understand your purpose and your mission.’

‘But why me? I still haven’t understood what I’ve got to do with all this.’

‘David, you’d better sit down because I’m going to tell you something that could give you a shock. Take a deep breath. Now listen.’

David sat down slowly, trying to imagine what Galzu was going to tell him.

‘You, David, are none other than a clone of Jesus Christ, the one who came to earth to save humanity from being destroyed. Your mission, as I have mentioned, is to prepare humanity for the return of Jesus. When this happens and you succeed in defeating Enlil, you and Jesus will govern the earth.’

‘What? I’m a clone of Jesus? How’s that possible? I can’t believe this!’ said David, getting up and walking back and forth, incredulous at what he had been told.

‘David, I’m going to leave you alone now to think about all this. It’s a great deal of information in a very short time. Relax in this armchair and when you’re calmer, press this button and I’ll come back.’ Galzu pointed out a sort of button made of crystal.

Galzu left the room so that David could think things over. The boy sat down in the armchair, facing the ship’s control panel, leaned his head back and began to think and to remember everything Galzu had said, shown and revealed.

CHAPTER 16

Galzu returned to the compartment where David was resting. He put his hand on the shoulder of the boy, who was sleeping in the armchair, making him wake up suddenly, frightened, with a start.

‘Easy, David, it was just a dream. Your brain is processing and organizing the information,’ said Galzu, gripping David by the shoulders.

‘I had a horrible nightmare. War, death, destruction.’

‘Yes, I know, I could catch your thoughts while you were asleep.’

‘You read thoughts?’

‘Yes, and I can communicate by telepathy and implant some dreams.’

‘Did you give me that nightmare?’

‘Partly, yes. I wanted to prepare you for what I’m going to show you now. Unfortunately we can’t travel in time for you to see what is necessary, for what I’m going to show you happened over a period of many centuries. It would be impractical for us to be hopping from one moment in time to another, so I’ve collected some images of the period you need to know. I’ll show you them and explain them.’

‘OK, I’m ready; I think I’ve had enough sleep. What are you going to show me?’

‘Today I’m going to show you how the myth of Satan the accuser originated. You’ll also learn what happened on earth some thousands of years ago, and then I’ll explain where you come into the story.’

‘Show me, then, Galzu. Now you’ve pricked my curiosity.’

Galzu took a crystal and set it in a metal box in the ship’s control panel. Once this was done a three-dimensional hologram appeared and images began to be visible. Galzu began his explanation:

About three thousand years before Christ, the world was divided into four regions. It was an era of wars and misunderstandings between the gods. They were very full of themselves, spoiled and used to having whatever they wanted whenever they wanted it. Their egos were bigger than they were. Even though almost all of them belonged to the same family, they spent their time in wars and domestic disputes to prove who had more power and more wisdom; and, naturally, they disputed territory and made the humans fight for them. They used humans as chess pieces and planet Earth as their chessboard. This was a very troubled time, some centuries after the great flood which almost

destroyed humanity.

At the center of the conflict were Inanna, granddaughter of Enlil, and Marduk, son of Enki. Inanna accused Marduk of being responsible for the death of her husband. Marduk in his turn wanted to be the supreme god of all the earth. He spent years stirring up the humans against the other gods and trying to convince them all to give him control of the earth. He was indignant because the gods had scorned his father Enki, Anu’s firstborn son, and declared Enlil the successor to the throne of Nibiru.

Marduk, as Enki’s oldest son, claimed the right to govern the whole earth; but the council of gods decided to divide it into four regions. The second region, which included Egypt, was given to Marduk. He accepted reluctantly, as he had bigger pretensions. Though unsatisfied, Marduk went to Egypt and changed his name to Ra, becoming the great god of the Egyptians. Some time later, still angry at not having been granted power over the whole earth, Marduk declared war on the other gods. He planned a campaign whose purpose was to take control of all the regions and so establish his supremacy. This would indeed have happened if it wasn’t for Enlil, Enki’s brother and Marduk’s uncle.

The gods possessed weapons of mass destruction: for example, the hydrogen bomb, almost a thousand times more powerful than the atom bomb which destroyed the cities of Hiroshima and Nagasaki. At this time the divine clans were divided, Enlil’s clan opposing Enki’s. The brothers were still on speaking terms and were polite to each other, even though Enlil harbored some envy of Enki who was Anu’s firstborn son.

The disputes got more and more bitter, and the Anunnakis’ egos were going to end up destroying humanity, which was not to blame for anything. In truth Enlil had always been opposed to the creation of the humans: since the beginning of the experiment with the clones he had criticized his brother. And Enlil envied Enki’s wisdom, as he himself lacked sufficient knowledge to create anything exceptional. His brother, on the other hand, was always studying the sciences and became a great scientist.

When Marduk declared war on the other gods, Enlil accused him of being responsible for all the quarrels between the gods. Privately, Enlil wanted to destroy Marduk and all humanity, which Enki and his nephew were protecting. Enlil wanted humanity to consist of a few human beings chosen by him, which he and his sons and grandsons would govern in the way they chose, with no outside interference. So Enlil decided to do away with mankind. The god would save only Ibruum, known now as Abraham, and his family, who would be obedient only to his clan. Enlil would destroy the followers of Marduk and Enki.

Ibruum was a direct descendant of Noah, and so possessed the blood of the Anunnakis. To protect Ibruum and his family from the anger of the other gods, Enlil told them to flee to a distant land. This anger would come in the shape of seven thermonuclear bombs which would devastate life on earth. Enlil, with the consent of the Council of Nibiru and of his father Anu, and contrary to the wishes of his brother Enki, ordered bombs to be dropped on the principal cities of earth, today called Sodom and Gomorrah.

Seven bombs, each with its own particular destructive powers, were dropped on seven cities of the planet. The ruin and the catastrophe were complete: as well as the humans, a large portion of the plants and animals of earth also perished. In the regions not directly affected by the weapons, people were killed by the radioactive dust which spread around the globe. Almost all humankind died. Only the city of Babylon survived the attacks, as the wind carrying the radioactive dust didn’t reach there. Ironically, Babylon was Marduk’s stronghold, where he was worshiped as the supreme god.

Unfortunately for Enlil and his descendants, the attempt at annihilation of the humans by means of hydrogen bombs came to the notice of the council of the great Intergalactic Confederation. The council members were dismayed at the news, as life on earth should have been preserved, with the humans evolving under the protection of the Anunnakis; no one should destroy them, let alone without the consent of the Confederation. The Anunnakis were playing at being gods and the true gods weren’t happy about it. As punishment for their ill conduct, the leader of the Intergalactic Confederation council announced that those responsible for trying to destroy humanity would be imprisoned and isolated in another dimension for millennia. The punishment should serve as a warning to other civilizations not to try and define the destiny of a planet, however under-evolved it might be.

Soldiers of the Confederation were sent to earth. Shortly before they arrived, the Anunnakis realized that something was approaching earth at high speed. At first they though it was an asteroid; soon afterwards, analyzing the body’s trajectory, they saw that it was a great spaceship. All the Anunnakis were concerned, now that they knew that a Confederation ship was approaching so soon after the explosion of the bombs. At once they contacted the council of Nibiru. The council warned them that now their fate, and Earth’s, were in the hands of the Confederation, and that there was nothing Nibiru could do. Enlil knew that basically they were coming because of him, and because of the weapons of destruction he had targeted on innocent beings. His sons and grandsons were distraught and wanted to flee to avoid being punished for what they had done. Enlil refused to leave the earth, wanting to stay and confront the Confederation and to explain why he had attacked the humans.

Shortly afterwards a great ship, several thousands of yards in diameter, rounded in shape and with flattened ends, entered earth’s atmosphere. The ship was gigantic and resplendent. Almost all the equipment and armament of the Anunnakis was automatically neutralized. The Anunnakis, who till then had been playing at gods, were terrified. The Confederation ship was so huge that it could be seen from many parts of the planet. It was anchored several thousand yards above the ground, and smaller ships flew out of it, heading for the city where Enlil, his sons and grandsons, and also Enki were to be found. Enlil was astonished to see that the Confederation knew exactly where they were, and asked the others how that could be. All the Anunnakis, including Enki, who had been against the destruction that had been carried out, went out of the palace to greet the small ships. From inside them great shining beings came out. They were twice as tall as the Anunnakis, though their bodily structure was similar to the Anunnakis’ and the humans’; but they were of a greenish color, with shining blue tones in some parts of the body, and they did not wear any clothing. Through an instrument that translated into the language of the Anunnakis, one of the beings spoke:

‘We know that you, Enlil, were responsible for the destruction of the beings that inhabited this planet. What do you have to say in your defense?’

‘My lords, my acts were necessary. The creation of humanity was a mistake of my brother’s, with the consent of my father. Wars were fought over territorial disputes. Cleansing was necessary, and I did what I did only with the consent of the Council of my planet Nibiru.’

‘It is not your planet that decides who should live and who should die in this our universe, and you even less so.’

‘Lords, my intentions were of the best. I beg you to forgive me.’

‘What is done, is done. I have orders to take you to our planet: you and those who were your accomplices will be judged by the council of the Confederation. Your fate is in its hands. Now come with us. All those responsible must enter the ship,’ said one of the confederation soldiers, while the other three held weapons to be used in case there was any resistance.

Then Enlil and some of his sons and grandsons, including Inanna, went up into the soldiers’ ship. Before they embarked Enlil said to Enki:

‘Brother, please request the Council of Nibiru to go before the Confederation and plead on our behalf. We will be judged and we could be put to death for this.’

‘Enlil, unfortunately there’s nothing I can do for you, and I don’t think our father can help either. Take responsibility for your acts and submit to the punishment they choose for you.’

‘Brother, you can’t just abandon me now. We are brothers and it’s your duty to protect me,’ said Enlil, as he was being taken to the entrance into the ship. ‘If you don’t help me I will take it as betrayal, and one day I shall have my revenge.’

Enki, with tears in his eyes to see his brother in that plight, just watched, knowing that he should pay for what he had done. After all, no one should cause the death of many, especially not from entirely shameful motives. While the smaller ships were taking off to return to the mother ship, Enki went back to the palace. He waited until the communication equipment started working again, and then contacted his father.

‘Father, Enlil has been taken away by the Confederation soldiers. He will be judged for the destruction he caused on earth.’

‘Son, although the Council consented, we forgot that a life once created can never be destroyed. That is what our creators taught us. I think that our Council is also responsible for Enlil, but now there is nothing more we can do.’

‘Father, we can’t leave him alone at a time like this. We must do something to help him.’

‘There is nothing we can do. Without doubt the Confederation knows that Enlil did what he did with our consent, and that he’d have done exactly the same without it. That’s why they’ve taken him to be judged. We can’t intervene – if we did we could make things worse. The Confederation members are very advanced beings, and they are opposed to the death of any creature. I am sure they won’t condemn your brother to death. He will be punished, but not executed. Now the earth is in your hands. It is your mission to protect it and to deliver knowledge so that humankind may evolve. This is our will and also the will of the Confederation. Control your son Marduk’s impulses and his ego. Show him what trouble these petty disputes get our race into. What sort of example are we giving to humankind, who love us unconditionally and model themselves on us? Show the humans the way. I’m counting on you, my oldest son. Soon I shall be on earth to see how it’s all progressing.’

The great ship docked on the artificial planet which had been built to house the armies and the Council of the Intergalactic Confederation. The Anunnakis who were to be tried looked out from the ship open-mouthed at such technology and grandeur. Without much delay they were taken before the council, made up of twelve beings from twelve different races, who were very different one from the other. There were large, medium and small races. Through a translator the council made its declaration.

‘Enlil, son of Anu, destroyer of the human race and other earthly beings, what do you have to say in your defense?’ asked the leader of the council, sitting on a sort of floating armchair located in the middle of an oval formation.

‘Lords of the Council. During the voyage I have reflected on my actions. I did what I did with good intentions. I would like to ask forgiveness for the deaths I caused. Please do not take my immortality away from me. My sons and grandsons here present are also free of guilt. They acted solely in accordance with my instructions, or they would not have done what they did.’

‘We sense in your words and in your spirit that you are not being totally frank with us. We see that you have a great hatred in your heart, much envy and rage. This is not healthy. You, in your position, should be more evolved. There are more important things than disputes about the ego, or about territory, or even about titles.’

‘Lords, I am sad and angry because I see no one of my family here to bear witness on my behalf. But I am contrite and I ask you to take this into consideration.’

‘The witness borne by your family would be of little use. What you did should not be done to any living being, however insignificant it may appear in your eyes. Life on earth must continue: this is a decision that was taken by us even before the great flood. A decision of the Confederation cannot be questioned, but you didn’t only question our decision, you acted against it, thinking only of yourself,’ was the opinion of one of the council members, sitting beside the leader, a tiny being almost invisible to the eye.

‘I did not know about this decision. I thought there would be no problem in extinguishing a creation of our own.’

‘No created being can be destroyed. If you now regret what you did, you should have thought of it before. You used humans as slaves to mine gold and, when you no longer needed them, you simply decided to exterminate them. That is the worst thing of all,’ replied another of the members.

‘I ask for pardon, Sirs. Truly our ego took control of us.’

‘We will give you a chance. Your immortality will not be taken away, but you will be sent to another, parallel dimension on planet Earth itself. This will be your punishment for what you did, and will serve as an example to all the races of our universe, including the human race itself,’ was the verdict of the leader.

‘For how long shall I have to remain exiled in this dimension?’ asked Enlil in fear.

‘That will depend on you. When you learn to respect life, you will be freed. Your accomplices must go back to their planet of origin. They will only be allowed back to the earth when you are freed from your exile. Those are our orders: if you do not carry them out you will be summarily eliminated. Now you may retire, as we have more cases to judge,’ replied one of the council members fiercely. The soldiers took Enlil and his clan back to the ship that had brought them to the Confederation. The ship took off and carried them back to earth. The ray this time did not penetrate the atmosphere, but opened a gateway to a parallel dimension. One of the small spaceships, carrying only Enlil, flew through the great open gateway, which immediately closed behind it. The ship entered the earth through a parallel dimension and slowly descended to the ground. Enlil could see a planet which was totally different to the one he knew. The green of the plants had given way to white sands. The ocean, once blue, was now black. On every side there was nothing but darkness. As he got closer to the ground he could see small sections of rivers and forests.

The ship headed for the trees and the water. For an indefinite period of time, this was where Enlil would remain in exile. It was a punishment he had to accept, since nothing could be done to change it. Enlil’s dear ones (his wife Ninlil, his granddaughter Inanna, his oldest son Nergal, and Ninurta and Abgal) were taken back to Nibiru. Before landing, Enlil could see in the distance fallen ships, overtaken by the vegetation. In that place there were also two other races that thousands of years before had threatened life on planet Earth.

‘David, this is the story of the ancient gods and of how humanity’s destiny was shaped by the quarrels between them. Enlil is better known today as Satan, a name that comes from the Hebrew and means “accuser” or “adversary”. The name was invented over a period of years, when men began to tell part of this story. Enlil rebelled against his family and in particular against his brother Enki. He blamed them for condemning him to exile. After several years of his punishment, Enlil found ways of interfering in our plan. Since then he and his soldiers have been making human lives hellish. Enlil has many soldiers in our dimension and is in constant touch with them, giving them orders as to what to do. Worse still, he has allied himself with the other two exiled races. These two races are known today by men as the Greys, because of their color, and the Reptilians, who are a species looking somewhat like a lizard. They had tried to dominate the earth before the Anunnakis arrived. The Reptilians hunted and killed animals purely for sport. The Greys wanted to consume all the earth’s natural resources, as their own planet had been totally devastated. For this type of behavior the Confederation arrested the leaders of these races and put them where Enlil is today. The many myths about demons are the result of contacts with these two races. The people of old, when they came across these beings, automatically related them to demons. Also because of them, images of Satan are generally related to aesthetically unpleasing beings. Nowadays the Greys walk the earth, capturing animals and human beings for scientific experiments, and to study evolution and human weakness. The major problem is that the Greys have free access to planet Earth. They made a deal with the USA in exchange for technology. They supply technology, principally arms technology, to the USA, and the USA doesn’t interfere in their plans, so they aren’t intercepted in American air space. That is why there are many more close encounters registered in the USA than in any other country. But the Greys have made deals with other countries too.

As far as we know, Enlil promised these two races territory on earth in exchange for help in dominating the planet. Enlil wants vengeance on his brother Enki and on humankind, and that is why his soldiers have created a world order which controls nearly all the earth. These soldiers are princes, bankers, religious leaders, billionaires, in other words, the people who control seventy percent of the world’s wealth. In total they are thirteen families, all controlled by Enlil. The leader of these families is called Benjamin Uggae. He is a hybrid between one of Enlil´s sons and a human woman, which is why he lives much longer than humans do; but fortunately he is not immortal. He is the son of Nergal, who promised him immortality if he did everything he was told. In return for his loyalty he also received great wealth and the control of a secret order called the Illuminati. His intention is to create a single world government subordinated to the order. When this happens, Enlil will take power. Part of humankind will be wiped out by hunger and by the wars caused by disputes for food. In case this should not happen, Enlil and his followers are developing a chemical weapon which can destroy a good part of the population. The remainder will be Enlil’s slaves. This way he will have his vengeance and the Confederation will be unable legally to take steps against him, since in theory he won’t have taken control of the planet by force, but will have been chosen to rule by the humans themselves. But, my dear David, this is just the tip of the iceberg. In time you will discover much more. Be prepared!’

CHAPTER 17

New Mexico, USA, 14th June 1947

William Brazel, farmer, was riding across his property with his son, when there was a great noise over their heads which scared the horses, who reared up and galloped away. Brazel managed to control his horse and began to chase his son, whose horse was continuing to gallop at full speed. With a huge effort Brazel caught up with the boy, grabbed the reins and brought both horses to a halt. When father and son calmed down and looked up at the sky, they saw a huge trail of smoke which was heading towards the east.

‘My God, what was that?’

‘I don’t know, Dad, but it was a terrible noise.’

‘It must have been another of those balloons the government sends up to monitor the weather. Follow me, son, let’s go that way.’

The two of them galloped towards the tail of the smoke trail, which extended from the sky to the ground. After riding some three miles they came on a wide trail of destruction across the earth. They were behind a hill, now outside the limits of the farm, and they rode down it in search of the end of the trail.

‘Dad, I think it was a plane. Look at that stuff that’s been thrown out,’ said the boy, pointing at some wreckage.

‘That’s odd, planes don’t fly in these parts.’

Going along the edge of the furrows, they could see big pieces of metal scattered everywhere. The objects were the color of silver and didn’t seem to be battered, just cut. The horses started to get uneasy and then stopped dead, unwilling to go any further. The men dismounted and as they walked, felt heat which was getting ever hotter.

‘Son, stay here and I’ll go ahead to see what it is.’

William hurried up to the top of another hill and saw in the distance another scrape in the ground and broken pieces everywhere. Night was falling and he decided to go home. Before remounting his horse he picked up a piece of metal which formed part of a trail of broken objects. Then he went back to the farmhouse with his son.

As the broken pieces weren’t on his property, Brazel stopped worrying about them. Days passed and nearly a month later he decided to return to the place where the furrows were, to see if anyone had picked it all up. This time he went with his family: his wife, his son and his daughter. When they got to the place, the scratch in the ground was less deep, but the broken pieces were still there. The horses didn’t panic this time and so the family managed to get closer to where the pieces were concentrated. All of them dismounted and began to pick up small pieces of metal. Near the end of the furrow, they could see a rounded object, made of metal and very large. It looked like a military plane but it had no wings, and the markings on the hull were different from the usual lettering. ‘It looks like it’s written in Japanese or Russian,’ he thought. William was afraid and he told his family not to

stay there.

‘Let’s get out of here. It must be a Russian plane. When I go into town I’ll tell the sheriff.’

They went back towards the farmhouse, but first dropped in on their neighbor, their friend Floyd. William told him what they had seen and showed him one of the objects they had picked up. The neighbor then told them that rewards were being offered to anyone who could provide evidence of the existence of flying saucers, and asked if what William had seen could be a flying saucer. William was excited at the idea of the money. The next day he went to the police station to tell his story to the sheriff George Wilcox. George listened carefully to what he had to say and immediately phoned the air base at Roswell, to report what the farmer had told him. That same day they sent Major Jesse Marcel and Captain Sheridan Cavitt to the place where the wreckage had been found, to check out the report, since William’s testimony coincided with what they had been told about a month earlier by people who had called the base reporting a meteor falling from the sky.

When they got to the wreckage, the officers immediately identified the ship as being alien to planet Earth. What seemed to be the rear part was totally destroyed and they could see the inside through the hole made in it. The officers quickly contacted the base and asked for reinforcements. Carefully the major and the captain went closer to the ship. Underneath it they found two burnt bodies. From their size they seemed like children, but the bone structure was different. The major started to climb over the wreckage, examining it with a torch, as he went into the ship. Soon he was standing inside it, and from there he could see his colleague, also with a torch in his hands and pointing it at him. He went forward carefully. After a few steps he could see a body lying on the ground. It wasn’t burnt, but it was a different sort of being, with grey skin like leather, similar to a dolphin’s skin. The major was speechless and sweated nervously. He shone the light on to the creature’s face and saw that it was dead. Advancing a little more, he heard a sound coming from inside the ship. Perhaps something had fallen. Major Jesse recoiled in alarm and shone his torch into the distance. A being identical to the one on the ground was trying to hide in a corner of the ship. It was alive but very badly hurt. The major went forward slowly. In spite of the fear he felt, something was telling him that he was not in danger, since he was there to help. The officer came nearer and kneeled down so as to be at the same level as the creature. He slowly put out his hand and touched it on the shoulder. The creature was sitting on the ground, seeming weak and very badly hurt. On its face a vertical membrane opened and closed, giving it an exhausted look. Jesse stayed there with the creature, so that it would understand he wasn’t going to hurt it. Some minutes later the sound of trucks and jeeps could be heard. The captain, who was waiting outside,

called out:

‘Major, the cavalry has arrived!’

‘I’m on my way back,’ the major shouted back.

And in a gentle voice, he said to the creature:

‘Don’t worry, we’ll get you out of here. We’ll look after you.’

After some activity and having received Major Jesse Marcel’s report, a medical team, wearing specially insulated suits, laid the creature on a stretcher and carried it into an ambulance. Meanwhile another team of army doctors searched the ship, looking for more survivors. The military sealed off the area, giving out that a truck laden with chemical products had had an accident near there. In a few hours the ship and all the wreckage had been removed from the scene. The bodies were taken to a military base. The next day, a headline in the Roswell Daily Record proclaimed:

Roswell Military Air Base Captures Flying Saucer on Neighborhood Farm.

CHAPTER 18

Pacific Ocean Depths, 14th June 1947

The inhabitants of the planet Nibiru, under the leadership of Enki, were entrusted by the Intergalactic Confederation with protecting planet Earth from other invading races. Though there were alien peoples with technology much superior to the Anunnakis’, the Confederation provided the latter with the necessary technology to help them protect the earth. As humanity was created by Enki, it was his responsibility, since the atomic incident centuries earlier, to protect it until it reached a new level of evolution and could defend itself. Enki had set up many secret bases, most of them hidden in the ocean depths. There was also a secret base inside the moon, which helped monitor all the earth’s orbit. The Anunnakis found a great quantity of water in the interior of the moon, and so it was possible to build a base there, affording a privileged view of any point on earth or within its orbit. Each base held hundreds of Anunnaki soldiers as well as humans recruited by Enki’s army. The majority of the Anunnaki soldiers on earth had been born there and so did not know Nibiru, their race’s planet. Carall and his assistant Onlik were sitting in the control room of one of Enki’s bases, located in the Pacific Ocean near the coast of the United States. It was a normal day. For a long time nothing had happened, and everything was strangely calm, too calm. The control panels were made of crystal and there were larger crystals which sent out a light creating a three-dimensional hologram showing earth’s orbit, some points in space, and a large area of earth stretching from the USA to Mexico. Carall was in charge of the monitors that day. As his assistant was at his side, he decided to take a walk round the base to see if anyone needed anything. Carall got up and, as he was walking towards the door, an alarm started to ring. He turned to look at the great hologram which appeared behind the crystal panel.

‘Onlik, what happened? All I did was to get up…’

‘Carall, look at this. Thirteen unidentified objects heading towards earth at great speed.’

‘They can’t be meteors, their flying formation is too perfect. Calculate impact time,’ Carall told the computer.

‘Impact time, 45 minutes,’ the computer informed him.

Carall sat down in a cold sweat.

‘Intruder alert. Moon base, we need visual identification of approaching objects,’ said Carall.

‘Visual contact established. There are thirteen invading ships. They do not have the Confederation’s permission to be in this system.’

‘Can you identify who the ships belong to?’

‘Real time visualization of the ships in progress. Our system cannot identify them.’

‘Carall, I recognize these ships. The Confederation had one of them in custody when I was doing my apprenticeship there. They belong to the race whose leaders were imprisoned in the same parallel universe as Enlil. That means they belong to one of the races allied to Enlil.’

‘Moon base, we are sending ships to intercept the invaders. Have you had any communication with them?’

‘Negative. We attempted communication but there was no reply.’

‘Commander, there is a formation of possibly hostile ships near our orbit. Request permission to intercept them,’ said Carall, contacting his superior on the video link.

‘Positive, Carall. Do that right away before they enter earth’s atmosphere.’

‘Attention intercept units. Contain enemy at twenty minutes from our orbit. Send twenty ships as there are a good number of them.’

‘Understood. On our way.’

Twenty ships set off on the mission; ten from the Pacific base and ten more from a base at the North Pole. When the twenty intercepting ships approached the thirteen invaders, the latter broke formation and scattered at great speed. A vigorous pursuit began. Apparently the invaders were faster than the Anunnaki ships. Five ships succeeded in throwing them off their track, and went into hiding in various points under the ocean. Two ships were destroyed and five more flew off rapidly towards the sun, taking flight when they realized that ten more ships had been sent to intercept them. Faster than the Anunnaki ships, the enemy couldn’t be caught. But before they fled they succeeded in destroying five Anunnaki ships, which became dust in space. During the battle one of the invaders was hit, but managed to enter earth’s atmosphere. As the Anunnakis were busy with the other enemies, they thought it had been destroyed. The ship fell and made an emergency landing, crashing into a deserted area of the US, leaving a great trail

of wreckage.

CHAPTER 19

Roswell Military Air Base, July 1947

For the first time in the history of mankind, man had captured a biological extraterrestrial being. Pieces of ships, wreckage, and alien gadgets had in the past been collected by the North American government and the governments of other countries, but never an alien being. The military was in an uproar. While they were worried about how that race might react, they were happy to be able to study a living being from another planet. In the wreckage of the crashed ship they found twelve bodies, eleven of them dead. Most of them had been burnt to death and it was impossible to study them. Only three bodies were fit for analysis and the fourth was alive and recovering. The army doctors took care of the creature with its grey skin and enormous black eyes. Its head too was immense, out of proportion to the size of its body. Analysis showed that the bodies of these beings were more fragile than the human body. They had no vocal cords, but they did have hearing organs. They were little more than three feet high and had just four very long fingers, the fourth being a sort of opposed thumb, like humans. Two hearts, one in the centre of the chest and another, much smaller, near the back of the neck, appeared to be complementary. The heart in the neck helped pump blood through the brain, which was twice the size of a human brain. The creatures had no teeth, nor did they have reproductive organs immediately visible; but they had a small hole at the base of the spine which the doctors assumed was a channel for elimination.

For two days the creature, nicknamed EBE-12 (Extraterrestrial Biological Entity No.12), had been unconscious and breathing with the help of a machine. The autopsies carried out on the other EBEs helped to determine the type of medical treatment which EBE-12 required. It was under strict security, and watched over by three doctors and three soldiers twenty-four hours a day. It was secured to a bed in a chamber made of triple reinforced glass. If it awoke it would be unable to run away or try anything. When Dr. Carlson Smith monitored EBE-12’s heart he noticed that it had begun to beat a little faster than normal. This worried him and he got up to look through the glass at the creature, and he saw that it was moving one of its fingers and its neck. A few moments later its eyes slowly opened. A sort of membrane that served as an eyelid was opening and closing, like a lizard’s eyes. ‘It’s scary,’ thought Dr. Smith and the other team members. When the creature was fully awake it tried to lift its body and began to struggle when it realized it was restrained. The heart in its chest accelerated to four times its normal speed and the heart in its neck beat even faster, like a humming-bird’s: nearly a thousand beats per minute. The doctors were frightened and informed their superiors that EBE-12 was awake. Dr. Smith tried to communicate with the creature via a microphone:

‘Please keep calm. We are here to help you. We want you to get better. Can you understand me?’

The creature, apparently understanding what was said, gradually calmed down.

The beating of the upper heart, in the neck, fell to five hundred per minute, though still very rapid compared to a human’s, or any other terrestrial animal’s heartbeat.

‘I would like to come into your room and talk to you. If you understand me and will allow me to come to you, nod your head.’

Then EBE-12 lowered its head slightly, indicating that Dr. Smith could come into the chamber. When he was getting ready to do so, Colonel Jordan Goldman, the base commandant, stopped him.

‘What’s this, Dr. Smith, have you gone mad?’

‘Colonel, we have managed to communicate with the creature and it consented for us to approach it.’

‘We don’t know its real intentions; it could be luring you into a trap.’

‘What do you expect us to do, Colonel, without vocal chords it can’t communicate with us. I thought I should try sign language.’

‘OK, you can try it. But it’s at your own risk.’

‘Very well.’

Dr. Smith cautiously entered the chamber.

‘Are you filming this?’ asked the Colonel.

‘Yes, Sir!’ replied one of the soldiers.

Inside the chamber, Dr. Smith walked cautiously towards the creature, which didn’t take its eyes off him. The others, elated, watched the scene from the other side of the glass.

‘From what I could observe, it seems you can understand my language,’ suggested the doctor, and the creature nodded its head.

‘Great. And you know how to speak…’ hardly had he completed the phrase, when his head began to spin and he felt a sharp pain in his head. The doctor fell to the ground, clutching his head in his hands. At once the commandant sealed the door, terrified at what might happen. The pain lessened and Dr. Smith slowly got up. The creature was conversing with Dr. Smith by telepathy.

‘Forgive me, that’s what happens the first time a brain received telepathic signals,’ said the creature.

‘My God, I’m hearing a voice inside my head! Is it you? How is this possible?

Colonel, EBE-12 is talking to me by telepathy.’

‘Telepathy? You must be crazy!’ exclaimed the Colonel via the microphone.

‘Where am I? What do you want of me? What happened to my ship?’ asked the creature.

‘You are in a US government base. We found your ship which had crashed on our land. You were the only survivor.’

‘My companions were deactivated?’

‘Deactivated? I don’t understand the concept. You mean “dead”? Yes, they were deactivated. Some of them were burnt to death…’ He was interrupted; images of the other beings appeared in his mind. Images of the autopsy, of the rescue. The being was accessing all the doctor’s memories and now knew as much as everyone there.

‘I understand. From what I saw in your memories you plan to study me.’

‘It’s not that exactly: we want to learn more from you. Who are you? Where did you come from? Aren’t you distressed at the news about your companions?’

‘Distressed? I don’t recognize that word.’

‘Distressed means ‘sad”.’

‘“Distressed” denotes emotion. I understand. We do not feel distressed. We do not have this kind of emotion. But only their bodies were deactivated. Certainly their knowledge was stored in our ship’s computer and has now been transmitted back to base.’

‘I don’t get that. Can you explain more clearly?’

‘Our brains are connected to our ships’ brain. If we are deactivated, or something like that, the information from our brains is sent back to the main ship and transferred into another body, a clone. So when these bodies “die”, their information is saved and transferred to the new body almost instantaneously. All the information is recovered.’

‘I don’t think I understand entirely how it works. My God, how is that possible? Do you have some way of communicating with us other than by telepathy? I want my friends to hear what you are saying.’

‘Yes, I can use some equipment of yours and my messages will show on it.’

‘Great. Can you do that now?’

‘I need you to bring the equipment to this room. That wall blocks my sensors. Can you untie my arms? I promise I won’t do anything to harm you.’

‘Colonel, he’s asking for some equipment to communicate with us. I think a telex machine would do. Can we untie him? He guarantees he won’t do anything to harm us.’

The soldiers carried a heavy telex machine into the chamber. In the meantime the Colonel gave his permission to untie EBE-12’s arms, and he, too, cautiously entered the chamber.

‘Doctor, ask him what he’s doing on our planet,’ the Colonel whispered to Dr. Smith.

Hardly had the Colonel finished speaking when the telex began to print out:

‘We came to your planet on a rescue mission. Some of our leaders are imprisoned here, but in a parallel universe. We have worked out a way of freeing them, but to do so we need your collaboration, as we can’t do anything without your permission.’

‘And just how did these leaders get into a parallel universe?’

‘It happened hundreds of earth years ago. At the time your race didn’t exist and we came to study the species that lived here. In the course of some experiments in your planet’s orbit, a gateway opened and our leaders entered another dimension. They have remained there because until now we didn’t have the technology to bring them back.’

‘I understand,’ said Smith. ‘Colonel, I think it would be a good idea for you to call in some physicists to watch this. This parallel universe thing is out of my league. If anyone is going to understand what EBE-12 is explaining, it’s the physicists.’

‘I’ll have them sent for,’ said the Colonel, staring at the creature in amazement.

‘Please, tell me, how can we help you? And how can we be sure you’re not here to destroy us or enslave us?’

‘If we had wanted to destroy you we’d have done it already. In any case, races from other planets are protecting you. To save our leaders we have to open a gateway. It can only be opened using a particle accelerator, which you still do not possess. Our proposal is to supply technology and know-how. In return, you will allow us to make experiments here on earth, and you will also help us create the particle accelerator, which will deepen your understanding of the universe as well as saving our leaders.’

‘I understand. But why don’t you just bring one of these accelerator things here and open the gateway?’

‘Our planet is very far from here. If we went there and back the window of opportunity would have passed. And what’s more, we might not be able to bring this type of equipment to your planet, because your guardian race might stop us. For many years we have wanted to build this gateway, but we were waiting for your technology to evolve enough to make it possible. We are still short of the energy necessary to open the gateway and it will take several of your decades for us to get it.’

‘And what has to be done in this period of time?’

‘We plan to build an instrument which can accumulate energy from the sun. Planet Earth is constantly bombarded with particles which you know as neutrinos. They are microscopic particles, smaller than an electron. What you don’t know is that it is possible to generate an enormous amount of energy by condensing these particles. However the neutrinos, which are the particles sent by the sun and by the explosion of stars, and which we need to feed the accelerator, only reach the earth in great quantities every eleven years. It’s what you call the solar maximum. To open the gateway, the particle accelerator will have to create collisions between bundles of protons to generate energy of around a hundred electrovolts. This will form a small black hole and, at the precise moment, a small gateway to the other dimension will open for a few minutes, long enough for us to save our leaders. Once this is done we will go back to our planet. According to our calculations, the solar equipment will accumulate the required amount of energy at the solar maximum in 2012. This coincides with our deadline, which is on 21st December of that year, when the earth will be in alignment with the sun and with the center of your galaxy, which you call the Milky Way. On that date the particle accelerator will have to be switched on; and it will only reach a hundred electrovolts with the help of our equipment. In the parallel dimension where our leaders are now, they have a neutrino accumulator similar to ours, and from there they will help us to open the gateway. Fortunately we are able to communicate with the other side, otherwise we wouldn’t be able to synchronize the opening of the gateway.’

‘To be frank, I haven’t understood a word you’ve said,’ the Colonel admitted. ‘Physics isn’t my line, but we are bringing in personnel to help us. I think my government will do all it can to assist you, especially if there is to be technology in exchange.’

‘In any case we have to provide technological skills for you, otherwise it will take you a couple of centuries to invent the accelerator. You help us and we’ll help you. In fact it will mean cooperation between different peoples of your planet, because the particle accelerator isn’t a small thing, and it will have to be built at a specific location on the planet.’

‘Where would that be?’

‘On the border of Switzerland and France. The particle accelerator, when it is built, will take up an area of approximately seventeen miles in circumference.’

‘Jesus, that will be one big machine. One last question: do you have a name? What should we call you?’

‘It would be impossible to pronounce my name in your language. For the time being just carry on calling me EBE-12.’

‘We are arranging living quarters for you. We’re going to put you somewhere more comfortable. Is there anything else you need? Something to eat or something to drink? Do you need any help contacting your people?’

‘I thank you for your hospitality. I would like a little water: we can get a good part of our nutrients from water. And as soon as I am recovered I would like to go to my ship. From there I shall perhaps be able to contact my people to tell them that I am well.’

The colonel left the chamber and immediately contacted his general, who in turn informed President Truman what had transpired. A full report of the events at Roswell was sent to the president. Together with some other generals, Truman left hurriedly for the base, to see the fantastic creature for himself. Some days later, EBE-12 was totally recovered and had gained the confidence of the president and the army staff. They allowed EBE-12 to communicate with other beings of his race, to tell them what had happened, and to agree a place for them to meet. A large group of army personnel was mobilized to receive the alien spaceships and the government was prepared in the event that they showed any hostility.

It was night in the desert of New Mexico when the lights began to show on the horizon. In instants they were close to the group made up of the army personnel, the president of the USA and EBE-12. When they saw their colleague was there and in good health, the other biological entities began to land their ships. Five leaders from each of the ships disembarked. In a huge shed that had been set up, they began to converse by telex and to make official the agreement EBE-12 had proposed to the humans. The president undertook to help them as far as necessary to build the particle accelerator; in return, the humans would receive technological know-how which would advance their research by many decades. The aliens let the Americans keep the crashed ship to study, as well as the bodies of the aliens who had not survived. They would be taken to a secret base where they would help the scientists develop new technologies. President Truman took responsibility for presenting the case to the other world powers, since the know-how would be partly shared with other countries, principally members of the UN. In this way, the aliens would have free access to the greater part of the planet. They would be free to carry out their experiments and in return would offer technology from another world.

A few days later, the president set up an organ responsible for managing events involving aliens, as well as monitoring other related activities around the world. This organ would also monitor certain countries looking for information and unusual actions. It would be an intelligence agency, and among its members would be twelve men who were in charge of the project initiated there at Roswell. The codename of these twelve men was Majestic-12.

On 26th July 1947, President Truman signed the National Security Act, creating the CIA, the American intelligence agency. Among the agreements signed between the Majestic-12, the president and the CIA was a clause establishing that no other president elected thereafter would have access to the Agency’s files.

After the signing of the act creating the CIA, one of the Majestic-12 named Frederick Cullen, who had the president’s confidence, returned home after a series of exhausting meetings, sat down on his sofa and dialed a number in Switzerland.

‘Benjamin, how are you? It’s me, Frederick.’

‘Hello, Frederick, it’s been a while! I think you’ve got some news for me.’

‘Yes, big news. You won’t guess what it is, but we’ve just signed an agreement with an alien race. I could hardly believe it, but I remembered the time you said this would happen one day. How did you know?’

‘Frederick, thanks for letting me know. But don’t say another word. Come to my house as soon as you can, we’ve got to talk about this face to face. Don’t mention this to anyone else. What’s your level of access to the agreement?’

‘I have full access. I’m a member of the committee responsible for the whole project. In a few weeks I’ll be in Switzerland. See

you then.’

CHAPTER 20

Washington DC, 1959

The senator for Massachusetts, John F. Kennedy, had just got home after an exhausting day’s work. It was past eight p.m. and he sat down in a comfortable armchair in his office to finish reading a book he had started a short time before. The senator was in the habit of reading at least one book every two weeks, as he liked to keep up to date with what was happening in his country and around the world. Every day he read for at least half an hour. That day, a rainy Wednesday, shortly before he finished his reading the phone began to ring behind him. He put the book on the table beside him and got up to answer it.

‘Kennedy residence,’ he said, answering the phone.

‘I’d like to speak to Senator John Kennedy, please, tell him it’s Oswald Griffin.’

‘Hello, Mr. Griffin, it’s Jack speaking.’

‘Hello, Jack, you mean you answer your own phone? How democratic of you!’

‘Not at all, generally the calls are for me, so it’s easier to answer myself. My wife has her own line in the bedroom. But what do I owe the honor of this call to? It’s been years since we spoke.’

‘Jack, do you remember the last time we spoke, I told you the day would come when we would need you and you would be called on?’

‘Of course I remember.’

‘Well the day has come. We need you. You are being activated.’

‘Mr. Griffin, it’s an honor to be able to help. But remember that at the time we agreed a password?’

‘Yes, of course, I hoped you would ask. “When the day dawns the just will rise up.”’

‘“And the unjust shall perish.” Exactly.’

‘You have a sharp memory. Let’s get to the point. Can you meet me tomorrow for lunch at my house?’

‘Of course. I’ll clear my diary and meet you at your house. Midday?’

‘Perfect. Any special dish?’

‘Surprise me!’

‘Leave it to me. You’ll have a big surprise. See you soon, brother.’

‘See you soon.’

JFK hung up the phone thoughtfully. He took off his reading glasses and ran his hands through his hair, looking a little worried. ‘What can Oswald Griffin want with me? The Priorate needs me? I thought this day would never come,’ the senator thought to himself. Oswald Griffin was the grand master of a secret society the Kennedys had covertly been members of for many generations. Jack had been prepared since childhood, in case one day the society needed him. His grandfather had never been activated, his father only a couple of times; but if the grand master phoned in person, it must be a very serious matter and his mission a very important one.

The following day, early in the morning, the senator started to settle some domestic matters that were pending. He hadn’t slept very well due to his anxiety about the lunch he was to have. As Oswald lived quite close he would go straight there without going to his office first. At 11.30 a.m. the driver went to tell him it was time to leave. Shortly afterwards the senator’s car drove through the gates of the Griffin mansion, which opened automatically as it approached, doubtless because the guard at the gates had been given the license plate number of the car. They stopped almost in front of the door to Oswald’s house, where he was waiting for them.

‘Punctual as always, my friend,’ said Oswald as the senator was getting out of the car.

‘When you live nearby it’s easier to be punctual,’ said Kennedy as he greeted Oswald, who gave him a hug.

‘Good, let’s go in. Lunch isn’t ready yet, but we can start our chat in my office.’

The two went up a flight of stairs and into Oswald’s office.

‘Senator, I’ll get right to the point. As you know, our party is going to put forward a name to stand for the presidency.’

‘Yes, of course, but the name hasn’t been announced yet.’

‘Just so. I want to put your name forward.’

‘My name? But why?’

‘Jack, listen to me. We need someone from our order in the presidency. There’s a lot happening and it’s time for us to take power.’

‘Well, I will be honored by the nomination, but will the other party leaders accept it?’

‘I’ve already spoken to some of them who are on my side. It’s almost definite that you will be the candidate. First I wanted to talk it over with you and, naturally, explain what will happen after you’re elected.’

‘If I’m elected…’

‘Yes, you’ll be elected. But I’ve already got friends lined up in Europe and here in the States who’ll help finance your campaign.’

‘So what more is there for us to talk about?’

‘Jack, I’ll explain somewhat superficially what’s going on and what our order has got to do with all this. As you know, our order protects the secret of the Holy Grail. Our mission is to hide it from our enemies so that the relic doesn’t fall into the wrong hands. According to the prophecies, which you have studied, Jesus Christ is to be reborn from the blood which the Holy Grail contains. In order for that to happen, we cannot let Satan take power in any way. If he comes to power we are lost. Satan can count on people in every sphere of every government in the world, people who are plotting to bring in the new world order, which will serve to bring him to power. Our society’s mission, in addition to protecting the secret of God on earth, is to try to stop Satan’s servants bringing their plans to fruition. You must have seen it in the papers: a little more than ten years ago, in 1947, an alien spaceship was found at Roswell. I think you must have read about it…’

‘Of course I have; but in the end they discovered that it was a meteorological balloon.’

‘Er… That’s the story the military gave out to the population, to avoid a general panic breaking out. But the news was true, and in the ship they found an alien that survived the crash.’

‘Are you sure of that? If it was true we’d know, wouldn’t we?’

‘Jack, not even the president knows the truth about the case, let alone us. It’s top secret. If the president knows something he is certainly pretending not to. There is a power behind the throne, I mean a small group of men, military among them, who control information of this sort.’

‘I understand. But this is very serious: the president should be informed of everything.’

‘The only president who knew all the facts was President Truman, who joined the “other side”. This is the thing. The United States did a deal with the aliens in return for technology. The problem is that they propose to build a gateway that will let none less than Satan into this world.’

‘Forgive me, Oswald, but this story is a bit too fantastic to be true, don’t you think?’

‘This isn’t fantasy, Jack, it’s the pure truth. “There are more things in heaven and earth, Horatio, than are dreamt of in your philosophy.” Remember that?’

‘In any case, a single government trimming the sovereignty of every country and being run by just a few people isn’t ideal. We’ll really have to stop this.’

‘OK, let me summarize your mission. We need to have access to the information about the Roswell accident and about the US government’s deal with the aliens; we need to know where Satan’s gateway is going to be built; and we need to stop the advance of the new world order. For this to happen, power must be in the hands of one of us. Let me say in advance, however, that the task is extremely risky. As soon as you make a move they will try to eliminate you. You will have to be very, very careful. Are you prepared to make a sacrifice?’

‘Oswald, that’s the reason I took the oath when I turned twenty-one. If I wasn’t convinced about our society’s values I wouldn’t have done it.’

‘Excellent. I’m delighted I can count on you. Your help will be fundamental and I have no doubt your name will always be remembered.’

‘I’m delighted too. My father will be even more pleased, to know that our family will be a part of this resistance; that is, of course, as long as I win the election.’

‘It won’t be easy, Jack, but we’ll fight to the finish to win. Well, lunch must be served. I’ll give you more details while we eat, OK?’

‘Let’s go, I’m famished.’

The two of them walked to the dining room. Kennedy, although appearing calm, was anxious inside as well as happy about the nomination. After all, since he had entered politics he had dreamed of becoming the president of the United States. The job would bring extra responsibility now: to try to stop the advance of the Illuminati and the creation of the new world order. This would put him, and his family, in constant danger of assassination. But his principles spoke loudest and everything told him he should take part in this chapter of history, as well as being, or at least trying to be, an example for future generations of leaders. Finally the resistance would start to take shape.

CHAPTER 21

United States of America, 12th November 1963

James Murdock walked rapidly, with long strides, along the wide corridor which led to the office of the director of the CIA, John McCone. He was carrying a brown envelope addressed to the director, with the president’s seal beside a sticker marked TOP SECRET. The envelope had been handed to agent Murdock by a messenger from the White House. When he got to the door of the office he knocked and went in.

‘Mr. McCone, this envelope has just arrived from the White House.’

The director was absorbed in making notes on some documents that were scattered about his desk, and goggled at Murdock when he heard the words “White House”.

‘An envelope from the White House? Did you call to confirm they sent it?’

‘It wasn’t necessary, the president’s adviser phoned in person just as I received the envelope.’

‘Very odd. Well, give me the packet.’

The director quickly tore open the flap of the envelope and took out a letter from the White House, on headed notepaper, stamped and signed by President Kennedy in person. The letter read:

TOP SECRET

12th November 1963

Memo to:

John McCone, director CIA.

SUBJECT: Classification review of all UFO intelligence files affecting National Security.

As I had discussed with you previously, I have instructed James Webb to develop a program with the Soviet Union in joint space and lunar exploration. It would be very helpful if you would have the high threat cases reviewed with the purpose of identification of bona fide as opposed to classified CIA and USAF sources. It is important that we make a clear distinction between the knowns and unknowns in the event the Soviets try to mistake our extended cooperation as a cover for intelligence gathering of their defence and space programs.

When this data has been sorted out, I would like you to arrange a program of data sharing with NASA where Unknowns are a factor. This will help NASA mission directors in their defensive responsibilities.

I would like an interim report on the data review no later than February 1, 1964.

Signed: John F. Kennedy

President of the United States of America

‘My God, the president’s gone crazy. He wants to share secret documents, which even he doesn’t have access to, with the Soviets. We must talk to General McMillan. He gave explicit orders to inform him about anything related to these files. When the president has access to these documents he is going to want to know about Area 51 and, worse still, he’s going to want to visit the base. Murdock, you can go, I’ll phone the general; he’ll know what to do.’

‘Yes, Sir. If you need me I’ll be in my office,’ replied the agent as he left the room.

‘Ah, don’t mention this memo to anyone, do you hear?’

‘Yes, Sir, you can be sure of it,’ he replied as he closed the door.

The director picked up the phone.

‘This is John McCone of the CIA. Call General McMillan at once, it’s a top secret matter.’

The director waited a few minutes while they tracked down the general.

‘General McMillan speaking!’ bawled a coarse voice at the other end of the line.

‘General, we have a problem. I have just received a memo from President Kennedy in person, requesting access to all our documents; you know which ones I mean. And what’s more, he wants to share the information with the Soviets.’

‘My God, the president must have found out something,’ he muttered.

‘What could he have found out, general?’

‘Nothing, I was thinking aloud. John, destroy that letter at once. I’ll have to see what I can do here and I’ll get back to you soon. Don’t mention this to anyone.’

‘Yes, Sir! I’ll wait for your call.’

The general, one of the members of the Majestic-12, was indignant at what he had just been told. ‘Why does the president want to see the documents and, worse still, share them with the enemy? If this happens we will no longer be the greatest power on earth,’ he thought. The general got up out of his chair and went to the door of his office, which was ajar. He looked out to make sure there was nobody nearby. Then he closed the door and locked it. He went back to his desk and sat down. He thought for a few seconds, then picked up the phone.

‘This is General McMillan, speaking from the Pentagon. Put me through to Senator Cullen’s office.’

The general was calling Senator Frederick Cullen, another member of the Majestic-12.

‘What can I do for you, general?’

‘Senator, what we most feared is about to happen. Please meet me tonight at the usual restaurant, we have to talk. Eight o’clock suits you?’

‘OK, I’ll be there at eight.’

That night the general went to the restaurant, where he usually had important meetings. So as not to draw attention to himself, he went home first and changed out of his uniform. When he went in he looked round to see where the senator was sitting. He saw him at a table at the back and went to meet him.

‘Senator, McCone phoned me today, just before I called you. He has received a memo from President Kennedy requesting access to the confidential Majestic documents. And what’s more, he wants to share them with the Soviets and with NASA.’

‘My God, the president must have gone out of his mind. If those documents fall into the hands of the Soviets we’re lost. Not even he can see those files.’

‘I appreciate the problem, that’s why I got worried and called you. I don’t know what to do.’

‘Thanks for telling me, general. We’ve got to think up a way of stopping Kennedy doing this. How much time have we got?’

‘Till the first of February next year.’

‘Good, then we have time. Let me think about what to do and I’ll let you know. General, please, remember this matter is extremely confidential. Call McCone and tell him the same thing.’

‘No problem.’

After swallowing the rest of the wine that was in his glass the general got up and went out. The senator stayed there a while longer, thinking about the news he had received and about what he should do.

‘The only plausible solution is to eliminate the president. If he learns about our technology-sharing agreement and lets the information fall into enemy hands, we’re finished. We risk them boycotting our project for the particle accelerator. If that happens, goodbye to opening the gateway. I’ll call Benjamin now, he’ll know what to do - he’s got people planted in the CIA and the secret service; it won’t be difficult. I can’t get personally involved in this, now I’m a senator,’ thought Cullen, as he called the waiter to bring the check.

On 22nd November, as President Kennedy was being driven through the city of Dallas, passing through Dealey Square at midday, two shots hit him: one wounded him in the neck and the other in the head. He died about thirty minutes later.

CHAPTER 22

Earth, 1000 BC

Several centuries had passed since the great disaster which once again destroyed a large part of planet Earth, wiping out half the living beings in existence. Mankind was recovering and gradually spreading out again across the globe. With the help of Enki and his soldiers and messengers, the humans began to make progress as never before in their history. But even as progress was made, wars between men – principally for power, profit and lands – continued to intensify. Although Enlil and some of his family were exiled, the members of his clan who were free now acted on his behalf and against Enki. Even though Enlil was a prisoner in a parallel universe, he somehow found a link with the dimension of earth, where he could communicate with the Anunnaki and with those on earth. Via this link he could command his troops from where he was, and his soldiers always obeyed the master’s orders.

Even with all the teachings that the gods and the angels had passed on to the humans, a large number of them were born into hostile environments and became evil people. From the minds of these evil people arose the most terrible wars in the history of mankind. As the humans had spread to all the corners of the planet, the beliefs, the names of the gods, and the customs in each region were different, and so the earth became a place of extremely diverse cultures. This was more than sufficient motive for stronger nations to enslave the weaker ones. There was little the gods could do, as they had agreed among themselves not to interfere decisively in the history of man. They gave men free will, so that they could evolve in the manner they thought fit. Instructions and basic teaching were handed down by the gods. If the humans could abstain from killing each other they would be certain to evolve.

The first rulers of the first tribes of earth were direct descendants of the Anunnakis, the gods of earth. War and treachery saw to it that the royal blood no longer held sway. With Enlil in exile, his armies conspired on earth to try to seduce the humans and to prepare them for his return to the planet and, in consequence, to power. Enki’s soldiers, realizing that the legion of evil was taking a hand in human history, began to act to try to stop it. Mankind was losing its faith in the gods and their angels. Men began to worship images and false gods. They no longer obeyed Enki’s commandments, which he had given them to follow and to avoid the life of impiety, thus advancing towards a higher state of evolution. If men continued to disobey Enki, Enlil would easily retake power on earth, even though he was in another dimension, and the history of mankind would be very short. Anxious about this, Enki returned to his home planet Nibiru to talk to his father Anu and the Council. Enki’s body was now very wasted due to the long time he had spent on earth. When Enki met Anu, it was as if their roles had been reversed, that Anu was Enki’s son, and not the other way round. Anu was still young and strong, but Enki and his wife Ninki were no longer so vigorous. Enki went to a meeting with his father and the Royal Council of Nibiru to discuss the matter of the earth. The aged Enki, bent and white-haired, sat at his father’s right hand at the council table.

‘Hail my son Enki, who after many shars has returned to his home planet.’

‘GREAT EA, SON OF ANU, WELCOME BACK TO NIBIRU!’ all the people cried in one voice, using the name of Enki before he left for earth, nearly a million earth years, and nearly two hundred and seventy-seven shars earlier.

‘My son, in truth the physical conditions on earth have not been good for you. You are even older than the last time I visited you. I hope this time you have come to stay.’

‘Father, I have come to speak of a most important matter. But I do not intend to remain here. I have to go back because mankind needs me.’

‘My son, let your sons and grandsons care for earth’s destiny. If you go back to that planet you will not survive many more shars. I beg you to stay with us and we will try to recover your youth. Nibiru’s scientists have made great advances.’

‘I can stay for a while, but I will not delay long.’

‘But, tell me, what has happened on earth to oblige you to journey to Nibiru, to ask for help?’

‘Father, Enlil has found a way to communicate with his soldiers, even though he is exiled in another dimension. He is thirsty for revenge. He wants to take vengeance on me and on the humans, blaming us for his condemnation and exile.’

‘I always imagined that Enlil would be my heir here in Nibiru. His destiny suffered a sad end at the hands of the Confederation,’ mused Anu.

‘As well as revenge, Enlil is trying to discover a way to escape from exile and take the earth for himself. I think that if he succeeds he will enslave mankind as revenge.’

‘My son, there is little we can do against Enlil; after all he is in another dimension and our technology does not allow access to him. The only thing we can do is to build up our forces on earth to discredit Enlil’s soldiers and, when he returns from exile, I shall try to dissuade him from this pointless revenge.’

‘The humans are always at war. Soon they will wipe themselves out. And all this thanks to Enlil’s plotting, through which he is able to control kings and queens to serve his ends. Mankind is losing its belief in us. If this happens chaos will overtake the earth and they will kill each other. They are not yet evolved enough to understand the consequences of their acts.’

‘And what do you propose to do, son?’

‘During the long voyage from earth to Nibiru I thought of something, and I need your approval and the Council’s to put my plan into practice.’

‘Please go ahead. We have total confidence in you, my son, and we are conscious of your great wisdom. We will analyze your proposal and without doubt we will approve it. We will give you the support you need for the undertaking.’

‘I want to go down to earth as a human being, father. Like one of them. I want to take them words of peace and love and try to convince them that the path they are following leads nowhere.’

‘And how do you propose to do this, with this old tired body of yours?’

‘On earth I have developed research into consciousness transfer. I have experimented on humans and I have been successful in transferring consciousness from one man to another.’

‘That is very good. You are for sure one of the greatest scientists of our people. But what happens to the body that loses its consciousness?’

‘It goes to sleep, as if in a coma. As if in a dream. My aim is to transfer my consciousness into a human body, becoming one of them. I shall attempt to change mankind and protect it from my brother’s trap.’

‘But, Ea, that is very risky. If you are killed by the humans,’ said one of the council members, ‘won’t your consciousness in this human body also be extinguished?’

‘Unhappily, yes, that is the case. If my earthly body dies before my consciousness returns to my real body, I shall cease to exist. But I have thought of that too.’

‘Then tell us, son, for now I am concerned.’

‘Father, in my experiments I have only managed to transfer consciousness when the two subjects possess very similar DNA, for example, between siblings, or father and son, or mother and son. And even so I was only successful when I activated part of the human DNA which was inactive. My aim is to create a being genetically identical to myself, and then effect the transfer. This being will be immortal like we are, since if any human extinguishes my consciousness we can easily resuscitate my own body.’

‘Then the risks will be less?’ asked another member of the council.

‘Yes, considerably. And of course, I will be watched over by my sons and grandsons, and my soldiers will always be at hand to protect me. The risks are minimal.’

‘But, son, do you really think you can change the mentality of the humans?’

‘Their nature is like ours, father. They are born in a neutral state, without evil and without goodness. It is the environment they live in that makes them good or evil. If we carry messages of good to them they will become good people, they will carry our teachings with them and pass them on to their descendants. There will come a time when they are ready to evolve and then our work on earth will be at an end.’

‘My dear brothers of the Council, I ask you to vote to decide whether we corroborate my son’s plan or let mankind follow the destiny it has chosen.’

A murmur spread around the chamber. The eleven counselors began to discuss the matter between themselves. Some were for the proposal, some against. By the laws of Nibiru the decision could not come from Anu alone; it had to be a consensus between the king and the counselors. This system avoided the need for one person to make a decision for the many, and thus fewer mistakes were made. The oldest counselor came before Anu and said:

‘We, the counselors of Nibiru, vote for Ea’s plan. Let it be so.’

‘My son, my vote is also for your plan. Good luck in your undertaking. May the force be with you. Please ask my grandchildren and great-grandchildren to keep us informed of all developments.’

Enki got up and bowed to his father and to the whole council. He made a point of embracing and kissing each one of them. Then he traveled around Nibiru, for the people were anxious to see him again. His planet had changed greatly. There were many new things; even the clothing was different. The technology of his people had made great advances. The houses were now all made of crystal, and some of gold. Enki spent some time in Nibiru; he and his wife traveled to the four regions of the planet so that their people could see them. Then they both returned to earth, aboard a new ship, a present from his father, which was much more advanced than the one that had brought them to Nibiru. The couple also spent some time with the scientists of their planet, who regenerated their body cells. On the day of Enki’s departure, a large crowd gathered in front of the great palace of crystal. All of them wanted to see the king’s firstborn son set off back to planet Earth to save mankind. After all, it was thanks to the humans and to Earth that Nibiru had healed its deepest wounds, which many shars before had nearly destroyed it. The Anunnakis owed much to planet Earth and to the humans. The time to pay them back had arrived.

CHAPTER 23

Earth, 24 BC

With the proliferation of mankind on the earth, the gods had withdrawn to their ships to live. Now they floated somewhere over the Atlantic Ocean, now they went below the surface; and at other times they stayed in terrestrial orbit. The gods did this because, if some human should meet them, the news would get out and they would have no more peace.

Enki and his wife had been back on earth for some hundreds of years. The god’s ship, the greatest of all of them, was known as Atlantis, a name given by some humans who saw it and thought it was an island. It was a veritable city, with thousands of square miles and a large crew. Enki liked to leave it floating on the ocean and regularly had it moved from place to place.

Anu’s younger son loved the ocean so much that his name had once been Ea, which in Sumerian means “one who lives in the waters”. Later Enki was also identified with Poseidon. Enki’s soldiers, who were seen on earth as God’s angels, visited the planet frequently, passing on instructions to the chosen ones and keeping an eye on the progress of the wars caused by his brother Enlil. Enki frequently tried to find and destroy his brother’s soldiers or, at the least, send them back to Nibiru for trial; but they hid inside the earth, using passages that existed at places scattered around the globe, including at the poles. And as his enemies also possessed a powerful arsenal, Enki preferred not to pursue them into their realm. If a war broke out it would be the humans, unable to protect themselves, who would suffer most. Enki disguised soldiers of his militias and they served as confidants of the leaders all around the planet. In this way they could watch the human governments closely and anticipate the consequences of their actions.

Enki was completing the preparations for creating his own clone, which would be born on earth and possess the divine consciousness. If the experiment worked, he intended to keep the new body and abandon his present one, which was now very worn out and tired. Even after the intervention of the scientists of Nibiru, who had regenerated many of his cells, Enki had not regained the youthful body he had had hundreds of thousands of years before, when he first arrived on earth. It cost them dear to discover that the earthly laws of immortality were very different from those on Nibiru. The atmospheric conditions, as well as the oxygen, the water, the food, the sun – everything was very different from Nibiru and made the passage of time more onerous on earth.

By means of much research and numerous modifications of his own DNA, Enki prepared a number of embryos containing the seed which would give birth to him on earth. However, with these minor modifications his new body would be more resistant and more powerful than his present one. Research had advanced considerably and some inactive genes in Enki’s DNA would be activated now, in his new body, creating a more highly evolved Anunnaki. But Enki did not want the conception of his new body to take place in just any womb. The blood of the woman who brought him to earth in his new body should be the blood of the most recent men created by the Anunnakis. After Adamu and Tiamat, the first earthborn, various other creatures had been given life, including some from a cross between humans and Anunnakis. Enki wanted to be born from his own lineage, and so he asked one of his soldiers to go down to earth and to choose a good man and woman, descendants of David. They would be the parents of Enki’s earthly mother. King David was the son of Jesse who in turn was Enki’s son; and soon Enki would be reborn from his own blood, which would make his mother’s pregnancy easier. Gabriel, the soldier Enki most trusted, after some time on earth, identified a couple of the lineage of the house of David. The woman, however, was infertile and now too old to have a child. Gabriel gave Enki the news.

‘My lord, I have found a good couple, both of the house of David. But the woman is old and infertile. Her name is Anna and every day she prays to you asking for you to give her a child. The couple is very devoted to you.’

‘This is much better news than I expected, Gabriel. The people will see this sterile woman’s pregnancy as a miracle. Our plan to take love and peace to mankind will start earlier than expected. Bring the couple to our ship during the night. We will inseminate the woman with her husband’s seed and, when they are least expecting it, she will be pregnant.’

‘So be it, Lord.’

When night fell, Gabriel and some soldiers went down quietly to the back of Joachim and Anna’s house. They gave them sedatives so that they should not wake up and then took them to the ship, which set off back to the mother ship, in earth orbit. There they collected Joachim’s seed and an egg from Anna. Anna had not got pregnant because there was an obstruction in the tubes which prevented the egg from being fertilized. Using eggs and sperm, Enki created an embryo and made minor alternations in its chromosomatic structure, engendering a girl child, not a boy.

The embryo was implanted in Anna’s womb. She and her husband, after a few hours’ rest, were taken back to their home on earth. They could not be allowed to know what had happened but must believe that the conception had happened normally, through their coupling.

Some weeks later, at night, Gabriel took Anna once again to the ship. While she was unconscious they were able to test her blood and confirm that she was pregnant. When Gabriel put her back in her bed, he brought her a dream in which he declared:

‘Anna, the Lord has heard your prayers! You will conceive and you will bear a child, and the whole world will speak of the fruit of your womb until the end of time.’

Anna, still dreaming, replied to Gabriel:

‘May you be blessed, my Lord God. When I receive the fruit of your blessing, whether it be male or female, I will offer it to the Lord and it will be at your service until the end of its days.’

Then some months passed. Anna’s relations and the members of her tribe thought her pregnancy was a miracle of God. She had been sterile, and she was advancing in years, and now she was to have a child.

The day arrived and Anna gave birth to a girl, and she gave her the name of Mary.

CHAPTER 24

Bethlehem City, 6 and 7 BC

Mary lived for twelve years in the temple, in accordance with the teachings of her tribe. When the twelve years were up, the priests of the temple had a discussion.

‘Behold, Mary has completed twelve years in God’s temple. We need to know what to do with her, before she becomes a woman and defiles the sanctuary of our Lord,’ said the holy men to the high priest.

The high priest did not yet know what should be done. And so he began to pray to God to ask for guidance about Mary’s future. At nightfall, when the temple was empty, he was the last to leave. When he was locking the great wooden door, at the back of the temple, a wind came from behind him with such force that it lifted his robe and blew sand in his eyes. He rubbed them hard to clear them, and then he saw a bright light come from the sky. At once he fell to his knees and bowed his head as a sign of respect to the angel, which told him:

‘Zacharias, go and call together all the widowers of the village. Let each one of them bring a stick. The one that receives a sign shall be the husband and guardian of Mary.’

Zacharias hardly had time to look up and give thanks for the angel’s message, when the light disappeared into the sky and faded into a star.

The next day Zacharias gave the angel’s message to the other priests, and they hurried to spread the word throughout the village, summoning the widowers. In no time the widowers assembled and went in search of the high priest. Zacharias took hold of the sticks they had brought and began to pray in the temple. At the end of his prayers he observed the sticks, but no sign appeared. He therefore decided to return them to their owners. But when he was handing back the last one, a shining white bird flew out, hovering over the head of the man whose stick it was. This man was Joseph. Then the priest cried out:

‘It is fated that you, my good man, shall take for yourself the virgin of the Lord.’

‘I have children and I am old. She is only a girl. I do not think it is right and I do not want to become a figure of fun for our tribe,’ replied Joseph.

‘Fear the Lord, Joseph. You have been chosen to protect the virgin of God. You cannot deny our Father.’

Joseph was afraid that something might happen to his family if he disobeyed the orders of God, and took Mary under his protection, and said to her:

‘I have taken you from the temple of God. I will leave you in my house, in safety, and I will make a journey. Soon I will be back. The Lord will keep you until my return.’

May was now fifteen years old. One day she went to the well to draw water to drink and for cooking, and as she was pulling the bucket up, she heard a voice behind her.

‘Hail Mary, full of grace. The Lord is with you. Blessed are you among women!’

Mary let the bucket fall as she turned and tried to see whose the voice was. She became very frightened when she was there was no one nearby, although she had heard clearly what was said to her. Mary began to tremble with fear and rushed back towards the house. A little later, recovered from her fright, she decided to finish sewing one of the garments she was making for her husband. As she sat at the door of the house, she could see a tall man in bright robes heading towards her. Mary was confused.

‘Have no fear, Mary. I am here to bring you a message from our Lord. You will conceive and give birth to the son of God,’ announced the angel.

Mary could not believe what she was hearing.

‘Am I to conceive a son of almighty God and give birth, like other women?’

‘It will not be thus, Mary. You will be with child with the son of God without the need to conceive through carnal knowledge of a man. You will remain untouched. The son of God will be born of you and you will call him Jesus, for he shall be the savior of his people.’

‘Behold the handmaid of the Lord. Be it unto me according to your will.’

The angel slowly moved away. It skirted a tree, and a bright light was seen, and the angel disappeared as if it had never been there. Mary ran to tell her news to her cousin Elizabeth. She knocked at her cousin’s door full of happiness. When Isabel heard her knocking she left what she was doing and hurried to open the door. When she saw Mary she said:

‘Who am I to receive into my house the mother of the son of God?’

‘Elizabeth, how do you know of this?’

‘The angel Gabriel appeared to me and he told me. I too am expecting a child. It was a blessing from God. The angel Gabriel told me that my son’s calling on earth will be to help yours.’

As Joseph was still away on his travels, Mary decided to stay at her cousin’s house. Six months went by. Mary was now sixteen. When she heard that her husband was returning, she also went home, at night, so that nobody of the village should see her now obvious belly. Some days later Joseph arrived, and when he went into the house he saw Mary, pregnant. He couldn’t believe it and threw himself to the ground, weeping bitterly at the disgrace of it.

‘And now, how shall I present myself before God? I took this virgin from the temple with the duty to protect her, and I have failed. What will happen to me? How could you do this, Mary? Did you perhaps forget our Lord God?’

‘Joseph, please, be calm. I am pure and have never known a man.’

‘Impossible. So where did this child you are carrying come from?’

‘By God, I do not know how it happened…’ Mary hadn’t finished speaking when Joseph rushed out.

Late that night, while Joseph was walking and thinking about what had happened, a bright light appeared over his head, and a voice spoke to him:

‘Joseph, be not afraid for your maiden, for she is carrying in her womb the son of God. Your mission will be to protect them and, when he is born, his name shall be Jesus. He will come to earth to save his people.’

Joseph was struck dumb. He fell to his knees while the light over his head was dimming.

Some months later, when he had confronted the ire of the priests of the temple, who thought that he had violated the Virgin Mary, the news came that the Emperor was conducting a new census and that the people should return to their home towns to be counted. Joseph and Mary set out. She rode on an ass with her husband on foot. In front of them went Joseph’s children. When they were only three miles from Bethlehem, Joseph saw Mary put a hand to her belly with a worried look. And Mary called out:

‘Joseph, help me get down, for the fruit of my womb is struggling to be born.’

They were on a desert road, and there was no place nearby for Mary to give birth. They hurried on and further ahead they could see a cave. Joseph carried Mary to the cave, told his children to look after her and hurried to the city to find a midwife. After some hours of searching, as he was passing close to a mountain, a woman who was coming down it shouted to him:

‘Where are you going in such a state, man?’

‘I am looking for a Jewish midwife.’

‘But you are from Israel?’

‘Yes I am.’

‘And who is giving birth?’

‘It’s my wife. She is Mary, who was brought up in the temple and conceived by the grace of the Holy Spirit.’

‘Is that the truth?’

‘Come and see with your own eyes.’

Coincidence or not, the woman was a midwife. She had come down from the mountain where she had seen a bright light some minutes before. Joseph and the midwife walked swiftly towards the cave. Before they got there they could see a bright light shining over the place. Once inside the cave they found Mary in labor. The light in the sky gave out another smaller light which went towards the cave and entered it. Suddenly the beam of light grew bigger and almost blinded everyone there. When the light receded they could see the child being suckled by Mary.

The midwife exclaimed:

‘Blessed be this day above all the days of our time. I have seen a great miracle with my own eyes.’ The woman went out of the cave and began speaking to a friend who was just arriving: ‘Salome, Salome, I have to tell you of a marvelous thing never seen before in this world. A virgin has just given birth.’

‘My God, I cannot believe such a thing, I must touch her to believe,’ replied Salome.

The two of them went into the cave. One of Salome’s hands was covered with burn scars. She asked if she could touch Mary, to confirm what the midwife had said. Mary said yes, and when she touched her she saw that her hymen had been broken only recently. Salome exclaimed:

‘Woe is me for my lack of faith, for not believing in the living God! May I hold the son of God for a moment?’

Mary held out the child for Salome to hold. Trembling, Salome held it in her arms and, as she touched its face, her scarred hand began to itch. Seeing Salome in distress the midwife took the boy from her. Before the eyes of everyone there, the scars of the burn on Salome’s hand began to disappear. They all broke down in tears. The first miracle of the son of God had been performed before their eyes.

‘Salome, tell no one what has happened here until we are safely back in Jerusalem,’ said Joseph.

A few days later, Mary and Joseph learnt that Herod had ordered all the boy children under two years old to be killed. The good man was terrified. He packed up their things, and put Mary and Jesus on the ass, and they fled to Jerusalem. During their flight a constant light could be seen following them, high above their heads. The angels of God were protecting them.

CHAPTER 25

Spaceship Atlantis, earth orbit, 6 and 7 BC

Enki, his wife Ninki, Galzu, Gabriel, Michael and Raphael - the last three being leaders of the legions of Enki – were gathered in a great white chamber. Galzu had arrived on earth some months earlier, directly from the Confederation, where he represented Nibiru. It was many years since Enki and Galzu had seen each other. On the last occasion, Galzu had told Enki to save Noah and his family from the rains which flooded the whole world, a disaster caused by the proximity of Nibiru, which made the nucleus of the earth shift and spin around its own axis. The earth’s poles had been inverted, which had caused the melting of the icecaps and consequently the flooding of the world. Galzu had come to Enki to transmit the orders of the Intergalactic Confederation, which were to teach a family of the just to build a huge vessel to save themselves from the flood, together with thousands of species of animals and plants. At that time, Enlil was determined to let mankind perish, however for the first time the Confederation intervened, saving Noah and his family so that they should continue the human race on planet Earth. Noah was chosen for being one of the earthborn sons of Enki. Enlil was enraged when he heard of the Confederation’s plans, since it was his intention to destroy mankind which, in his view, should never have been created.

Enki, who was sitting at the end of a large table made of crystal, spoke calmly and serenely to his people:

‘We are meeting here today at a time that is all important for us: time to put into practice our long-term plans. As you know, I have created a clone of myself, with some alterations and improvements, which will enable me to be reborn on earth. I have taken the liberty of inviting Galzu to follow closely what we are doing and to witness our efforts to save mankind from itself and from my brother’s influence. Tonight we shall implant the embryo in the womb of Mary, who is duly prepared to receive it. When the child that is born reaches the age of twelve earth years, we will transfer my consciousness from my body to his. We are gathered her so that each one of you may know what part he has to play in this mission: Galzu and Ninki will be in charge, during my absence. Gabriel, you and your soldiers will go down to earth as men to protect my body from any harm that by chance may come to it. Michael, you and your soldiers will go on watching Enlil´s troops, and try to undo any evil they may do’.

‘Lord Enki, on earth I will be always at your side. But I have a question: what if the transfer of consciousness goes wrong? What shall we do?’ asked Gabriel.

‘I have made great progress with the tests, and after a number of adjustments no errors have occurred. There were problems when the DNA of one of the bodies was different from the other’s. In this case the DNA is practically identical. There is a minimal possibility of something going wrong with the transfer. But in any case, if there is a flaw, I will remain in this body and we will instruct the clone on earth to go ahead with the plan. It will be more difficult, as we will have to teach him many things, but I think that one way or another our mission will be a success,’ replied Enki.

‘Enki, as you know, the Confederation supports the plan and I am here at your invitation to help in any way I can,’ said Galzu.

‘Galzu, I thank you for your support and the Confederation’s.’

‘Enki, please be careful when you are on earth. As you well know, some humans are totally opposed to what you are doing, not to mention those humans who are under the influence of your brother’s soldiers. Please, I say again, be very careful with what you are going to do,’ said Ninki anxiously.

‘My lady, be comforted, I will protect our lord Enki, he will not be alone,’ Gabriel assured her.

‘Knowing this, Gabriel, I am more at ease. I am counting on you,’ replied Ninki.

‘Gabriel, go down to earth. Soon it will be dark. Bring Mary to the ship and we will carry out the fertilization process. Be careful not to be seen. It’s better you go now, while Mary’s region is still in sunlight,’ Enki commanded Gabriel.

‘Yes, Lord. I will be back in a few hours.’

Gabriel went out through a very tall, round door at the back of the white chamber. Outside two of his men were waiting. The three of them went to where Gabriel’s ship was waiting, a smaller ship than Enki’s, then took off and went down to earth. When they landed it was still light and so they chose a deserted area near Mary’s house. They waited in the ship for the sun to set and for all the village to be sleeping. Humans often saw Anunnaki ships and whenever this happened they got excited, thinking it meant some divine intervention. For this reason, the gods and their soldiers had been concealing themselves more in recent times. Soon the villagers went indoors and the lights in the houses were put out. Gabriel waited a little longer and then took his ship near to the window of Mary’s room. The brightness could be seen through the window. Moments later Mary’s body began to float, passed through the window and into Gabriel’s ship. Hardly had the light gone out when the ship disappeared, leaving a great trail of sand and dry leaves in the air, which slowly drifted back down to the ground. As the ship broke the sound barrier a thunderclap was heard throughout the village and men ran out of their houses with burning torches, just in time to see the trail of sand and leaves left by the ship. ‘An angel has appeared to Mary,’ was their conclusion.

In a few minutes Gabriel’s ship was moored beside the mother ship, which Anu had given to Enki on the latter’s last visit to Nibiru. Before Mary was transported to the mother ship they made her inhale a gas which put her into a deeper sleep. In this way they would not risk waking her and frightening her with what she would see. Mary was placed in a bed made of shining crystal and taken into Enki’s laboratory, where they all were waiting for her. Enki picked up from the surgical table an instrument with a shining tip of crystal. Ninki and Michael parted Mary’s legs and raised her clothing. Ninki used a rectangular instrument to clean her and to eliminate any bacteria which might contaminate the embryo or Mary’s uterus. After this sterilization, Enki inserted the crystal-tipped instrument into Mary’s vaginal channel. On a screen they could see the path the instrument followed to reach Mary’s uterus. When the procedure was finished Enki withdrew the instrument from the virgin, sterilized the area again and dressed her.

‘Wait several hours and leave her to rest. Then take her back. Return to earth in a few weeks to test her blood and confirm the pregnancy. Once it is confirmed, Gabriel will give Mary the news. If you need me I shall be in my quarters,’ said Enki, removing the silvered tunic he was wearing and leaving the laboratory.

Several hours passed and Mary was still unconscious. Gabriel had stayed by her side the whole time in case something should happen. He picked up an instrument the size of his palm, which was beside the crystal bed, and passed it over Mary’s belly. At once a three-dimensional colored image appeared above Gabriel’s hand, showing the inside of the woman’s uterus; a magnification of the image showed the embryo in place and intact. It seemed that all was well with Mary. Gabriel called his two soldiers, and they took her back to her house before the sun’s rays began to shine on the village. In a few minutes Gabriel’s ship was hovering over the virgin’s house; and a few seconds later a shaft of light carried Mary’s unconscious body back to her bed. Seeing that all was well with her, Gabriel gave orders for them to leave the place.

Three weeks passed on earth. One rainy early morning, Gabriel returned to Mary’s house. While she was asleep, a light shone through the closed window, in the house made of bricks of clay, passing through the walls and shining on Mary’s body, waking her up. Mary was frightened, thinking she was having some sort of a dream. When she realized it wasn’t a dream she was paralyzed with fear. The light shining on her got weaker and disappeared. Mary got up and went to the door, opened it quickly and rushed out of the house into the torrential rain. Looking at the window of her room, she saw a sort of stream of water. It was as if the rain water had made in the air a pathway to the sky. ‘My God, an angel? Thank you, God, for sending a guardian to protect me until my husband returns home,’ thought Mary, watching the trail of water slowly disappear. She went back into the house, dried herself, changed into dry clothes and went back to bed. She couldn’t get to sleep again and tossed and turned in bed until the sun rose. She couldn’t get the incident with an angel of God out of her head.

Back in the mother ship, Gabriel went at once to report to Enki. He passed through the ship’s corridors like a hurricane until he reached the control room where his master was.

‘Lord Enki, good news. Mary is pregnant and Jesus will be born,’ said Gabriel to Enki as he entered the room.

‘Excellent, Gabriel. Thank you for that wonderful news. When night comes take the news to Mary. Tell her that her son’s name shall be “Savior”, which in her language is Yeshua,’ answered Enki, smiling.

‘So be it, Lord. I will leave shortly,’ said Gabriel.

Gabriel went down to earth once more. He landed in the desert and flew towards Mary’s house, using the equipment attached to his back. ‘The time has come to give her the great news,’ he thought.

The angel landed behind some trees and saw Mary in the distance, heading towards the well with a large wooden bucket on her head. Gabriel went up to her as she was trying to pull up the bucket, now full of water and heavy.

‘Hail, Mary, full of grace! The Lord is with you, blessed are you among women!’ said Gabriel, from behind a large tree.

Mary let the bucket fall as she turned to try and see where the voice was coming from. She was very scared because no one was there, although she had clearly heard the words. Mary began to shiver with fright and set off at a run towards her house. Gabriel, watching her, flew towards her, and landed when he was near the house. He preferred to wait a little until Mary had got over her fright. Some minutes later he could see her sitting at the door, knitting. He walked up to her and said:

‘Don’t be afraid, Mary. I bring you a message from our Lord.’ Gabriel saw Mary lift her head and look at him. ‘You will conceive and give birth to the son of God.’

The Anunnaki soldier saw the look of perplexity on Mary’s face. She asked him:

‘Am I to conceive a son of almighty God and give birth, like other women?’

‘It will not be thus, Mary. You will be with child with the son of God without the need to conceive through carnal knowledge of a man. You will remain untouched. The son of God will be born of you and you will call him Jesus, for he shall be the savior of

his people.’

‘Behold the handmaid of the Lord. Be it unto me according to your word.’

Gabriel rose up to the sky, while Mary slowly lifted her head. He quickly disappeared into the horizon against the setting sun.

Once back on the ship, the angel took off his flying suit and gave orders to one of his soldiers.

‘Daniel, stay here on earth, mingle with the earthlings and protect Mary until the day she gives birth. Take your weapon and hide it. Tell me at once if anything untoward happens. You will be Mary’s guardian and our eyes here on earth.’

Gabriel gave Daniel some men’s clothing.

‘Gabriel, I will protect her with my own life. I will keep you informed about everything. Until we meet again,’ said Daniel, as he finished dressing and headed out of the ship.

Seconds later the doorway of the ship closed and it took off. Daniel set off towards Mary’s village. When he got there it was dark and the people were in their houses. What distinguished angels from men was their clothing, the color of their skin and their hair, which was a little lighter in the case of the angels, and their equipment. Daniel had totally white hair down to his shoulders. He was tall and strong. In spite of his white locks he looked little more than thirty earth years old. He had walked several miles to get to the village, since no one could know that he was a soldier of Enki’s legion or, as the humans called them, “messenger of God” or “angel”. Daniel was thirsty and hungry. He knocked on the door of the house next to Mary’s.

‘Good evening, sir,’ Daniel said to the man who answered the door. ‘I wonder if you could give me a little bread and water? I have come from far, I have no money and I am very hungry.’

‘Get out of here, beggar. I don’t want people dying of hunger in front of my house. Get going before I have you arrested for disturbing the peace.’

‘Forgive me sir, if I pestered you. But anyway I thank you. Be with God,’ replied Daniel, lowering his eyes in front of the angry man, and he went away.

Daniel knocked at the door of five houses, and all of them sent him away. At the sixth house, the most humble of all, a blind woman answered the door.

‘Yes?’ said the woman.

‘My lady, forgive me for bothering you at this hour, but I have made a long journey, I have no money and I am very hungry. If you could give me a little water and a piece of bread, I will pay you back double as soon as I can.’

‘My good man, please, come into my humble abode, it’s a pleasure to have you. You can have some of the best wine and bread that I have, and I don’t want payment in double. I will do for you what you would do for me.’ The woman left Daniel surprised and speechless. ‘Sit down, please, relax and feel at home.’

‘You aren’t afraid of taking a stranger into your house, and a man at that?’

‘Why should I be afraid? If you were going to do me harm you wouldn’t have knocked at the door, you’d have come in without knocking.’

‘A good point.’

‘You have a different accent. What part of the country are you from?’ asked the woman as she was putting out bread and wine for Daniel.

‘I am from very far away, practically from the other side of the world. Tell me, lady, how did you lose your sight?’

‘Roman soldiers put out my eyes with a dagger, as I had no money to pay them their taxes. I have been blind for more than ten years. They also took my husband’s life, a year after they blinded me.’

‘But that’s terrible! How could they do such an atrocious thing?’

‘My son, man is the cruelest animal of all; his capacity for evil is almost infinite.’

Daniel and the woman went on talking for many hours. In a short time, she told Daniel all about the customs of the village, and about the people he could trust and those he couldn’t. She told him where he could find work to support himself.

‘Lady, I won’t take up any more of your time. I’m going to look for a place to shelter until dawn comes and I can go looking for work to support myself.’

‘My son, you can stay here in my house. It’s small and humble, but there’s always room for one more son of God. I brought up my five children in this house and now I am alone, I can look after one more.’

‘Lady, I am grateful and moved by your offer, but I won’t abuse your kindness. Know that the Lord God has kept a place for you in his kingdom. This world needs more people like you.’

‘Very well, thank you for your words. Remember that the door of my house is always open to you.’

‘Thank you, lady. May I touch you eyes and make a prayer for God to heal you?’

‘Heal me? Only if it was a miracle. But go ahead, any prayer is welcome.’

‘Do you believe, do you have faith that the power of God will heal you?’

‘Of course I do.’

‘Lady, know that we all have the power of healing. It is enough to search for that power within ourselves.’ Daniel placed his right hand over the woman’s eyes.

‘Keep your eyes shut and only open them when you hear the door close.’

Then the angel took his hand off the woman’s eyes and went out of the door.

The woman, her eyes still shut, said:

‘Wait, you didn’t tell me your name.’

But she spoke in vain, as the man had already left. The woman’s eyes began to itch and when she opened them, she could see, for the first time in ten years. Her sight was still cloudy but she was no longer blind. She fell on her knees in tears and gave thanks to God.

‘I thank you, God, for the Lord sent an angel to heal me. I will speak of this miracle in your name as long as I live. Thank you, Lord,’ the woman said over and over again through her tears.

Minutes later the woman ran out of her house and began shouting in the middle of the road. People gathered around her while she told what had happened. ‘A miracle!’ they all declared. They all knew that her eyes had been destroyed. Now her eyes were healed and she could see again.

On the following day, Daniel found work near Mary’s house. This way he could keep an eye on her and protect her. His identity was safe, as no one had seen his face and he was on the other side of the village from where the old lady lived. Nevertheless the news that the blind woman had recovered her sight spread all over the region. Daniel ought not to have performed the cure without first asking permission from his commander Gabriel. On the other hand, he knew he couldn’t have left the woman, who was the only one to help him, in such a state. Even though she was amongst the poorest in the village, she had shared the little she had with him. She was likely to go hungry in the future, but she couldn’t let her guest be without food. She truly deserved to get her sight back.

Many months passed. Mary stayed at her cousin Elizabeth’s house and returned home when Joseph arrived back from his travels. Some time later the baby was due to be born. Daniel went with the family to Bethlehem for the census. The angel saw what happened on the way there when Mary felt the first contractions, and at once told Gabriel. Gabriel lost no time in stationing his ship a little distance above the cave where Mary would give birth to Jesus. This time he took no precautions to avoid anyone seeing the lights of the ship; on the contrary he sent out a great ray of light to observe and protect the place. He sent a probe, which shone light in all directions, to the cave. Gabriel had control of the probe and he used it to sterilize the whole area where the baby would be born, as an infection could harm the boy Jesus who was to save the world. When Mary gave birth the probe hovered over her, and the crying of the newly-born baby could be heard. The probe sent out its rays one more time and then went dark, but stayed over the baby’s head. The probe sent information in real time to Gabriel and to Enki, who was watching the birth with his family. The boy Jesus, Enki’s clone, had been born, and soon would receive the consciousness of the Anunnaki god. Enki would use this young body to try to save all mankind. The first step had been taken. Now it was up to Enki’s soldiers to protect the child until it grew up. As for Jesus, he would only fulfill his mission on earth centuries later, at his second coming.

CHAPTER 26

Galzu’s Spaceship, the present

‘David, as you can see, the one that humans know today as Jesus is Enki himself, the son of Anu. You, therefore, are an exact copy of Jesus as well as the new body of Enki,’ Galzu explained to David, switching off the crystal that was projecting images of the time when Enki decided to go down to earth in a new body, of how he came to be born to the woman who carried this new body in her womb, and of the birth itself of the clone called Jesus.

‘Galzu, I’m scared. As far as I understand it, Enki will take my body, or rather, he will transfer his consciousness to my body, and so I will no longer exist,’ answered David, dumbfounded at what Galzu had shown him.

‘No, David, I told you before, Jesus will return to govern the earth together with you. Your mission is to prepare for his return. It won’t be necessary for him to transfer his consciousness to your body, since his body is still very young.

Otherwise the transfer would have been made when you were about twelve.’

‘Now I get it! That makes me more comfortable with all this. But to get back to the point: you mean to say that Jesus in reality is Enki, in other words an alien. It’s very hard to believe that. Added to which the fact that I’m a clone of Jesus … it’s all very surreal.’

‘I appreciate how you feel. You are like most humans, with ancient beliefs rooted in you, which were taught to you as a child, and it’s hard to get past that. Your subconscious accepted these beliefs as absolute truths. What we learn in childhood is very hard to forget. But little by little your brain will begin to accept new concepts which it is only now constructing.’

‘I know that everything you’re telling me is true, but part of me doesn’t want to believe it. I certainly would find it very hard to believe if you hadn’t shown me those images. And the fact that we traveled in time, and I saw all those things, proves to me that really the concepts and beliefs which exist in our planet today are totally mistaken.’

‘I wouldn’t say mistaken, just archaic. Humans latch on to very ancient concepts and beliefs. The existing records should have been updated. The truth is all there, in the ancient documents, even in the bible. And yet humans insist on a supernatural interpretation of those documents, even though they can easily be explained by modern day science or even by ufological research which many scientists and even governments have carried out. And it’s because of this failure to update the records that more and more people are becoming atheists. It’s hard, with the scientific knowledge that you have, far less advanced though it may be than what other peoples of the universe possess, to believe in the supernatural, things like angels with wings and special powers. The way these beings called angels are represented – as messengers from the gods, with wings – was invented by the Sumerians: they carved them that way in their sculptures because they always saw them flying, and in their heads anything that flew had wings. What we actually had was a propulsion unit strapped to our backs which enabled us to fly. That propulsion unit does in fact have wings, to give it stability in flight, but the wings are of metal not of feathers. Today if humans see someone flying they will notice that there is a machine on their back that allows them to fly. But thousands of years ago, people didn’t have any notion of such technology, and so they interpreted it as supernatural. And as the stories and teachings were passed from father to son over the centuries, even today people still believe what was believed in the days of old. What’s more, the Catholic Church concealed and destroyed many documents which prove that the gods and angels were beings from other planets. It isn’t in the Church’s interests for the truth to come out, otherwise people will start to think for themselves and put aside their faith. If that were to happen the Catholic Church and the new Christian churches would lose many of the faithful; and for them, “faithful” means money. Of course there are many entirely serious churches, but this is the problem we have. This is unfortunate, because there are good people in the Catholic Church who truly do want to do good; but its leadership is controlled by the Illuminati and therefore by Satan. The Catholic Church has been largely responsible for the slow pace of human development, both in subjective terms and technologically. If it wasn’t for its influence, mankind would be much further evolved than it actually is. But it is in its interests for people to continue to be alienated, so that they will go on giving it money. When Jesus said “Render unto Caesar the things that are Caesar’s, and unto God the things that are God’s” he meant that people should give Caesar money, for after all taxes are necessary, as long as they are used for good; and that to God they should give themselves. God doesn’t need money. Of course the churches need contributions to grow and to spread the word of Jesus, but it’s an unfortunate fact that a good part of them are corrupted by money and divert much of what they receive to finance the luxurious life-style of their founders and leaders.’

‘It’s true, the Catholic Church has done many bad things, all you have to do is remember the so-called “Holy” Inquisition, which killed and tortured millions of people. But to get back to powers. What Daniel did for that blind lady, isn’t that a power? And the scars of the other woman which were healed when she touched Jesus’ body?’

‘That power isn’t supernatural. It is inside each of us. Even humans can use it. You’ve seen cases where a person has some very serious illness and has such faith in being cured that they end up really being cured, haven’t you? That is nothing more than the brain making the body liberate certain chemical neurotransmitters which can help it heal itself. This is in human DNA. It was passed on to men when we created them. In most people this gene is dormant, but with will-power it can be activated. Our bodies are made of pure energy and so we can transfer our energy to other beings. Daniel transferred his energy to that woman – that’s all. His energy made her brain liberate certain neurotransmitters which, in turn, made her cells regenerate themselves. So she was healed almost instantaneously. Jesus cured people the same way, except that he had much more power, for Enki controlled his own DNA almost totally, and he could modify and improve it so that the energy in Jesus’ body was stronger. It’s the same power that you possess and that you will start using shortly.’

‘I understand… that’s good to know. But what I still don’t understand is why I must prepare for Jesus’ return. And why should I need to use these healing powers?’

‘When Jesus was on earth he said that many false prophets would appear before his return. Jesus will arrive in a spaceship, escorted by various other ones, and so people may think that he isn’t Jesus at all, but Satan trying to deceive everyone. What’s more, some countries may try attacking these ships and Jesus may be seen as a false prophet. That’s why you will have to prepare people for his return. You will use your healing powers so that people will believe in you. The same was true for Jesus many centuries ago. If he hadn’t healed anyone, do you think that people would still be following his teachings today?’

‘I guess not.’

‘Well then, the same thing is going to happen today. If you turn up and start saying you’re a clone of Jesus and that your mission is to prepare mankind for his return, everyone’s going to laugh at you and treat you as a lunatic, that’s if they don’t lock you up first.’

‘You’re right, people will only believe in my word if something “supernatural” happens. But you’ll have to teach me to use these powers.’

‘That won’t be necessary, my dear boy. When the time comes, when you feel that a certain person really deserves healing, you will do it automatically.’

‘But going back to what we were saying before: as far as I could understand what you said about humans, they truly need to believe in some superior being. They need to have something to grasp on to when things are difficult. To ask for help when they need it. I can see it’s difficult for them to take control of their own lives without something to hold on to.’

‘Exactly right, David. Humans are very needy and they have to find a force that’s stronger than themselves to believe in. This need is fed by the stories told to them over the years and, of course, by the brainwashing received at the hands of the Catholic Church for centuries. There are times when this neediness can help slow down their evolution. That’s why you were created: with the purpose of bringing at least part of the truth to men and to make them take another evolutionary step. Let’s go back to the bad part of all this. I have more to tell you about Enlil, or should I say Satan, and about when he will return. David, be very careful when you go home. We have some soldiers watching over you from afar, but Satan will do all he can to destroy you. The good news is that you are immortal up to a point. But if your body is destroyed by an explosion or something similar, it will be impossible to reconstruct it. That’s why they tried to kill you in the attacks of 9/11, that disaster that cost the lives of thousands of innocent people, including your adoptive father and the mother who bore you.’

‘What? You’re saying that the 9/11 attacks were because of me?’

‘Not just because of you, but also. The Illuminati, the eyes of Enlil on earth, are the most powerful men on the planet. Two of them are hybrids, that is a cross between an Anunnaki and a human. That means they can live for about five hundred years. These men are the owners of international banks, the arms industry and oil. They are the richest in the world, but their wealth is hidden in fake companies and they don’t figure in the lists of the greatest fortunes. These lists show, for example, that now the richest man on earth is Bill Gates, the founder of Microsoft. But Bill Gates doesn’t have even a third of the fortune of one of these Illuminati. Imagine if we added together the wealth of the thirteen leaders of the Illuminati, the eyes of Enlil on earth. The sect controls governments, companies, it makes wars, it kills presidents. It engineered 9/11 because it knew that the US would go to war with those probably responsible. The Illuminati would sell more weapons and after taking over certain territories, would have much more oil. So they contrived a way for a company with offices in the WTC to hire your parents and to create an area for children so that they would take their son to work. That’s all it took to put you in a situation that could have caused your death. The first plane should have hit your floor. Luckily the terrorist pilot was inexperienced, or you would have died. Actually you did die, but you came back to life shortly afterwards.’

‘To this day I don’t know how I got out of that building. I have nightmares about it and I just remember my mother, all covered in blood.’

‘We know that a friend of your mother’s, who was escaping, saw you on the ground. She picked you up and started down the stairs with you. Just then two of our soldiers were going up to try to save you, and they ran into the friend. They took you, locked themselves in an office on one of the floors and tele-transported you to the road behind the buildings, because it was near where one of our ships was, otherwise the tele-transportation would not have been possible. Tragically your mother’s friend also died in the attack, so if my soldiers hadn’t been going up to find you, and met her, you too would be dead.’

‘My God, I just don’t believe those people could do such a thing. How did they have the courage, Galzu?’

‘Calm down, David. You don’t yet know the half of what they have done. Who do you think engineered the two great World Wars? Who do you think Hitler was? There are still many, many things which I will gradually reveal to you. One thing you have to know is this: Satan will return to this world precisely on the 21st of December 2012. We still don’t know how it will happen. The last person who tried to find out, a president of the United States, was killed when he attempted to get access to the information.’

‘The government is involved in this?’

‘Yes. In fact there is a government within the government, controlled by the Illuminati. They are the only ones who know how Satan will come back. We’ve tried to infiltrate agents into this inside government, but we never had any luck. But we know that Enlil’s return is inevitable. If it isn’t in 2012 it will be some other time. I think it could actually be a good thing for him to come back, that way we can finish this thing once and for all.’

‘A war against Satan?’

‘Yes. The war that men call Armageddon. And it can’t be avoided.’

‘Galzu, I hardly know what to say. I hope this era of instability ends one day. Wait a minute: that date, 21st December 2012, isn’t it the last day of the Mayan calendar?’

‘Yes, and it’s no coincidence. In fact the date was established by the Olmecs, the first Mesoamerican civilization which spawned the Mayas, the Aztecs and the Incas. The founder of that civilization was none other than Ningishzidda, son of Enki. It was Ningishzidda who helped discover the calculations that Enlil´s sons worked out to get him back from exile. As a way of alerting his people about what would happen in the future, since he was returning to Nibiru, he stipulated that the last day of the calendar should be on that date. In fact, Ningishzidda explained to the Olmecs that, starting on that date, the world would go through a major transformation, which is true. There will be a long period of tribulation and wars and, once that is over, the humans who lived a good life will be taken to Nibiru. The earth will suffer catastrophic damage due to the approximation of Nibiru to the planet, but that will only happen later. After the catastrophes are over, the humans who have been saved will be brought back to earth and you, at the side of Jesus, will lead the human race and bring it to a new stage of evolution. Now I must take you to your planet. I will be in touch again shortly. Go to the United States and begin your mission from there. Wear this ring on your finger: when you sense that you are in danger, press the green stone on the ring. It will also serve as your identification by people belonging to our order, to assure them you are not an impostor. We have also put a tracker in you, so we can locate you in any corner of the Milky Way. Goodbye, my dear David, good luck and may the force be with you.’

Galzu gave David a gold ring with a disk inscribed in the middle of it, and wings on the disk. In the centre was a design of a sort of tree with two serpents entwined in it, reminiscent of the DNA double helix. At the top of the tree was a small green stone.

‘Thank you, Galzu,’ said David, embracing the Anunnaki tightly.

Galzu’s ship began to move and in a few seconds he and David were at the farm. A violet light shone out of the ship to the earth and David slowly descended from the ship to the ground. When he felt his feet touch the grass he looked up, and the ship had already vanished. David sat on the ground, put his head on his knees, closed his eyes and took a deep breath. When he lifted his head and opened his eyes it was nighttime, and he began to think: ‘My God, how I wish it was just a dream!’ Now he carried a great responsibility. The weight on his shoulders was immense. The burden was heavy. ‘I just hope I can do it!’

CHAPTER 27

Brazil, 23rd December 2008

David went home. Not having a horse he took a long time to get there, but they could not have landed any closer for fear of someone’s seeing the lights of Galzu’s ship. The boy was several miles from the house, but the walk would do him good. He could take the opportunity to think about everything he had witnessed and to plan his next moves. The green stone in his ring was giving out a light which gradually went out as he moved further away from where the ship had left him. It was night now and his parents would probably be getting ready for bed. When he got to the house he saw all the lights were out. ‘That’s impossible; mother doesn’t usually switch off the lights.’ He went up the old wooden steps that led to the door at the front of the house. When he got to the veranda he saw there was a piece of paper stuck on the door, and it was sealed by two black and yellow tapes. It was dark and David couldn’t read what was written on the paper, so he took it to the edge of the veranda where he could read it by the light of the moon. It read: “Crime Scene – No Unauthorized Entry. Civil Police of Assis-SP”.

‘My God, what has happened here? Where are my parents?’ David broke open the door with a single kick and ran desperately into the house. He switched on the lights and as soon as the living room was lit up, he saw a great bloodstain on the floor. He began to cry and fell to his knees, trying to grasp what had happened. He hurried round the house, trying to find anything that would give him a clue as to what had happened there. He went upstairs and down again, then ran to the barn where he saw that the animals had gone. He ran to the garage where there was still an old truck; the other cars had disappeared. He started the truck and drove madly into the town. In a few minutes he reached the police station. He left the truck in the street and ran inside.

‘Please, I have to speak to the officer in charge. I found this on the door of my house. Where are my parents?’ asked David, desperate and nervous.

‘Calm down, son, you’ll have a heart attack. Take it easy and we can talk.’

‘I can’t calm down till I know where my parents are.’

‘Tell me, where is your house.’

‘Beija-Flor Farm,’ he replied at once.

‘Good Lord, you must be David!’

‘Yes, that’s me. Tell me what’s going on.’

‘Sit down here, lad, and I’ll tell you what happened… Two days ago a neighboring farmer went to the house to talk to your father. The door was open and he found your parents dead in the front room.’

‘Dead? What do you mean, dead? It can’t be true.’

‘It was a brutal murder, the worst that’s happened in the history of our town. They were decapitated, it was horrible. It made the papers all over the world. We even thought the killers had kidnapped you, as your parents had been in here some days before to report you missing. Where were you?’

David had heard no more after the word decapitated. He was practically in a state of shock. His head was spinning and he could already imagine who had done it. Probably his enemies had gone looking for him and had killed his parents when they weren’t able to tell them where he was.

‘This can’t be happening to me, it’s a nightmare.’

‘David, tell us: where’ve you been all this time?’

‘I… I was traveling. I went on a trip and I didn’t tell anyone, or my father wouldn’t have let me go.’

‘I see. Have you got any idea who could have done this to your parents?’

‘Yes. I mean… No, I haven’t.’

‘Well, have you or haven’t you?’

‘No, I have no idea. Nobody would do this to them. Everyone liked them,’ replied David, sobbing.

‘We’re working on the hypothesis that it could have been one of your competitors in the coffee business; after all, you are the major producers in the region and there are witnesses who say this was upsetting a lot of people.’

‘I don’t know about that… I must see my parents.’

‘That’s not possible - they were cremated. The family took them to São Paulo for the cremation.’

‘And what’s happened to all the animals?’

‘They are at the farm next door. The farmer is looking after the animals until your uncle and aunt recover from the shock and can take over the work at the farm. Which reminds me, we must tell them you are OK.’

‘Wait, did you say my parents came here some days ago to report that I was missing?’

‘That’s so.’

‘And what did you do?’

‘We put your photo and description in the national register of missing persons. Your father went on television to spread the news of your disappearance, it cost him a fair penny for the national network. Your photo was all over Brazil. As for their deaths, I can’t understand how you didn’t hear about it; it was in the media here and abroad. And the tabloids said that you had done away with your parents and run off with your inheritance.’

‘Oh God, so that’s how they found me here, they must have recognized me from the photo and come after me. It’s all my fault,’ David was thinking as he strode up and down. ‘I’ve got to get out of here; they’ll be looking for me.’

‘I’m going back to the farm. I’ll speak to my uncle and aunt later.’

‘Are you sure, boy? We need you back here tomorrow to take an official statement from you, when you are less upset.’

‘Alright, I’ll come back tomorrow if I can,’ said David as he left the police station.

David got into the truck, shut the door and began to shout and weep despairingly. For the second time he had lost his parents. He was terribly sad about what had happened to his parents, but even so he couldn’t feel hate towards his enemies. He felt sorry for them. He wasn’t looking for revenge. It was a strange feeling he had never felt before. He took a few minutes to calm down, then dried his tears, started the truck and set off towards

the farm.

‘I’ll sleep a bit and tomorrow I’ll leave for the United States. This has got to stop.’

CHAPTER 28

New York, 26th December 2008

David disembarked at 7 p.m. at John F. Kennedy International Airport. He tried to enter the United States with his original passport, in the name of David Griffin. The men who had taken him to Brazil on the twelfth of September seven years before had given his mother his documents, passport, identity card and birth certificate. David had found the documents some years earlier, when he was nosing around in his father’s things. The passport was out of date, but that probably wouldn’t stop him getting into the country. He handed the passport to an immigration officer who at once spotted the expiry date.

‘Sir, your passport has expired,’ said the officer, as he leafed through the pages of the document. ‘And there’s another thing: as you are returning from Brazil, why is there no record of your going there?’

‘When I left the United States, I think they took me in a private plane. That’s why there’s no record.’

‘I see. Just a moment while I call the supervisor.’

The officer, a plump black woman, pressed a red button beside her computer. Twenty seconds later a man in a tie arrived to see what was happening, for it was rare for him to be called.

‘What’s the matter?’

‘This boy’s passport has expired and we have no record of him traveling to another country. The passport has no stamp in it.’

‘Mr. Griffin, do you have any other identification?’

‘Yes, of course. Here you are.’ David gave the red-headed man his social security card.

‘Mr. Griffin, will you please come with me.’

The man took David to a small room, which was used to interrogate possible illegal immigrants, people who tried to enter the country with a tourist visa or even with forged documents.

‘Please wait here while we check your documents.’

David was unworried. He had expected this. And his principal intention was that his enemies should know he was entering the country, which is why he didn’t use his Brazilian documents.

The man entered the identity number in the database and the computer gave him the message: DECEASED.

‘Deceased? How can that be? There must be something wrong, the photo in the database is the same as in the passport, and it really is the boy.’ The man was worried and called the extension of the director of the airport.

‘I’ve got a very strange case, Director. A boy is trying to enter the country with an unstamped passport and the system shows him as being dead.’

‘Dead? How can a dead person turn up with an unstamped passport? There must be something wrong. Have you checked the boy’s photo?’

‘Yes, it was the first thing I did. The photo on the database is the same as in the passport, and it is the boy.’

‘Wait, I’m on my way.’

In a few minutes the director walked into the room where the official was checking the documents.

‘Let me see that.’ The director began to check and to confirm the information. ‘I don’t know what can have happened, but it’s very strange.’

‘He told me he left the country in a private plane, Sir. That’s why there’s no record of his entering Brazil, which is where he’s just come from.’

‘That’s the least of my worries; what worries me is that he’s dead. Call the FBI and ask them to send someone here at once. The red-headed official called the FBI and explained the case. They asked for his passport number.

‘Mr. Johnson, my records show that this person died in the 9/11 attacks. He was in one of the buildings.’

‘But he didn’t die. I can see him on the monitor at this very moment.’

‘Keep him locked up. I’m sending some agents to check this out; they’ll be there in a few minutes.’

Forty minutes later, two FBI agents entered the airport office where the director and the immigration official were waiting for them. The agents were taken to see David, but only one of them went in to question him. The other remained outside, with the airport director, to analyze the process on the camera.

‘Good evening Mr. Griffin. I am special agent Carlson of the FBI.’

‘Good evening. I’d like to know how long I’m going to have to wait. I’m tired and I want to go to a hotel.’

‘Mr. Griffin, our database shows that you are dead. Can you explain how that can be?’

‘Yes, I can explain. After the 9/11 attacks I was taken to Brazil in a private plane. I was in one of the towers that were attacked and they managed to save me. Since then I have been living in Brazil and now I am returning. That’s why they thought I had died. It was all a misunderstanding.’

‘Yes, but why were you taken to another country? And why doesn’t your passport show your arrival in Brazil?’

‘My life was at risk. Some people wanted to kill me, I’m not sure why. That’s the reason some friends of my mother’s hid me in Brazil until the dust settled. And you people thought I was dead because I disappeared after the attacks.’

‘I see. And just who were these people who wanted to kill you, and why would they want to do that?’

‘I don’t know. I was very young and I don’t remember.’

‘And why have you waited all this time before returning to the US?’

‘Because I’m no longer in danger and this is my country, right?’

‘Well, I don’t know what to say. As far as the US is concerned you’re a dead man. You’ll have to get an attorney to arrange a temporary stay in the country until all this is sorted out. Bringing a person back to life’s not that simple.’

‘Till then what do I do?’

‘Till then you remain in detention. As this is a new one for us, we’re not sure how to handle it.’

‘I can’t stay in detention, I’m an American citizen. It’s not my fault if you decided someone was dead without even seeing the body. If you don’t have a body, I’m not dead, just missing.’

‘It’s not as simple as that. As the records showed you were in one of the WTC towers at the moment of the attack, and you were never seen again, you were automatically declared dead. And your file shows that your grandfather confirmed you were in the building, and that you must have died in the attack together with your parents.’

‘But as you can see, I didn’t die.’

‘Does your family know you’re alive?’

‘No, they don’t. I don’t know if I have family any more and if I do I don’t know where to find them.’

‘Well, we do. Your great-grandfather is a VIP and it won’t be hard to get him here. I’ll have you put in a more comfortable room, with a bed and a bathroom, so you can relax. I’ll order a meal for you, you must be hungry. We’ll try and locate your great-grandfather and bring him here to sort this out.’

‘OK, thanks for your kindness,’ answered David, getting to

his feet.

‘What a mess! We must keep it under wraps or the press will have a field day. We’ll phone George Griffin, the boy’s great-grandfather. If the kid is really who he says he is, Griffin will recognize him,’ said agent Carlson to the others, as he picked up the phone to call his superior.

‘The boy is Governor Griffin’s great-grandson, sir. We should tell him what’s happening and bring him here.’

‘Senator Griffin’s great-grandson? How’s that possible? Inform him at once. But just tell him someone’s trying to pass himself off as his great-grandson, no need to worry him by saying the boy’s story is convincing. Use that argument only if he’s unwilling to come to the airport.’

‘Yes, Sir. I’ll call him now. Goodbye.’

CHAPTER 29

New York, 26th December 2008

The governor of New York, George Griffin, was in his penthouse flat in Manhattan, where he had spent Christmas with his family. As a rule the Griffin family stayed on in the house till the day after the celebration. It was nighttime and George was in the living room with his wife, listening to an audio book beside the fire, while some of their grandchildren ran around the huge apartment and the adults played poker by the pool. To his surprise, his butler John came hurrying into the room with a cordless telephone in his hand.

‘Mr. Griffin, there’s an urgent call for you, says he’s an FBI agent.’

‘From the FBI, at this time of night? Another terrorist threat? Thank you, John, let me answer it.

‘Governor Griffin speaking.’

‘Mr. Governor, this is special agent Carlson of the FBI. Sorry for bothering you at this hour.’

‘Don’t worry, young man, I’m used to it.’

‘Sir, a boy arriving from Brazil has tried to enter the country with the documents of your great-grandson David Griffin.’

‘My great-grandson? David died in 2001. The documents must be forgeries.’

‘We’ve checked the documents, they’re in order. We knew your grandson had passed away, which is why we contacted you. We want to find out if someone could have had access to his documents, as we have no record of their being lost or stolen. The boy we have here is in possession of David’s passport and also of his identity card.’

‘My God, hold him there, I’m on my way to the airport.’

‘Yes, Sir, we’ll be waiting for you in the airport director’s office.’

‘What’s the matter, George? You look pale. What’s going on?’ asked his wife, thinking he was looking strange when he hung up the phone.

‘The FBI agent says there’s a boy trying to enter the country with David’s documents.’

‘David’s? Impossible.’

‘Where were his documents?’

‘At the time we thought they were with Sarah, in her office at work. When we brought their things here our great-grandson’s documents weren’t among them. You don’t think it really could be David at the airport, do you?’

‘I don’t know. I’m heading over there now. John, get the car ready. We’re going to the airport at once. My dear, don’t say anything to anyone, especially Thomas. Wait till I’ve found out what’s really going on.’

The governor’s car had hardly stopped in front of the airport doors and the governor was jumping out. John turned round to speak to his boss, but George was already hurrying into the building. Following him were two security guards. In minutes Griffin was at the door of the director’s office. All the guards recognized the governor and saw he was in a hurry, so none of them had dared stop him to ask him what he wanted. He opened the office door without knocking.

‘Where’s the boy?’

‘Good evening, Governor, I’m special agent Carlson and this is the director…’ He had barely completed the sentence when George interrupted him.

‘Agent Carlson, take me to the boy at once, after that we can talk.’

‘Yes, Sir. This way.’

They took the elevator and entered a corridor with doors off it.

‘Governor, he’s in this room. Would you like to see him first on the closed-circuit camera?’ asked the FBI agent, pointing to one of the doors off the long corridor.

‘No, I’m going in. Wait out here, please.’

‘As you wish, Governor.’

The governor let out a long sigh, feeling a tiny flame of hope. His hope was that, by some miracle, David had survived and had been missing all these years, perhaps having lost his memory or been kidnapped. Slowly he turned the handle and went inside. At the end of another corridor he saw a bed, two armchairs and a television showing the Weather Channel. George went forward slowly, trying to see who was there.

‘Hello, is anyone there?’ called the governor as he went forward. When he least expected it, one of the armchairs spun round 180 degrees towards him.

‘Just me,’ answered David.

The governor looked directly into the boy’s eyes. He couldn’t believe what he was seeing. Tears began to roll down his face.

‘My God, it can’t be… David, is it really you?’ said George.

David had grown a lot, but his face and his look were unmistakable.

‘Yes, it’s me. And you are…?’

‘David, it’s me, your great-grandfather George. Don’t you remember me?’

‘My great-grandfather? Ah… I think I do remember, yes, I’m not sure. My memories are pretty confused, but I have seen you before,’ replied David, choked up at being recognized by his great-grandfather and at his tears. He had hardly finished the sentence when he started crying too.

‘Come here, son, give me a hug,’ answered the governor, pulling David to him by the neck and embracing him tightly for a long time. ‘David, tell me where you’ve been all this time. We thought you had died in the 9/11 attacks.’

‘I can’t tell you what really happened, all I remember is that the building was on fire and I was trying to pull my mother out from under the wreckage. The next thing, I woke up in a car on a highway with two men who said they were helping me. We were in Brazil. They handed me over to a family there and I never saw them again.’

‘My God, how can this have happened? You managed to save yourself and angels must have hidden you. David, you’re nearly eighteen now, do you have any idea who you really are?’

‘Mr. Griffin…’

‘You can call me grandpa.’

‘OK, I’ve got to get used to it. Grandpa, I know about everything now.’

‘You know about everything? What is everything?’

‘I know I’m a clone of Jesus Christ.’

George was flabbergasted.

‘And how did you find out about that?’

‘A few days ago I was taken up in a spaceship and a being called Galzu explained everything to me. We traveled in time and he showed me who I was, and how and why Jesus was created; how mankind was created, and what my mission is on earth. He spoke of you too, that you are descended from Jesus and that you protect the secret and the blood of Jesus, which was used to make me.’

George was even more amazed, and he remembered that they were being taped.

‘David, let’s get out of here. We’ll go to my house, I’ll look after you and we’ll catch up with things. We have a lot to talk about. The whole family will be astonished to see you. Get your things.’

George and David walked out of the office, just as Carlson and his partner appeared from the next room where they had been monitoring the conversation.

‘Mr. Governor, I can’t let you take the boy. It’ll need a judge to authorize it.’

‘Mr. Carlson, I think you are forgetting who you’re talking to. If you prefer, I’ll call the director of the FBI direct and tell him you want to stop me taking my great-grandson back to my house.’

‘I’m sorry, Governor, I’m only doing my duty. Very well, whatever you say. We’ll sort it out later.’

‘One more thing, Mr. Carlson. I need that tape with the recording of my conversation with my great- grandson.’

‘But, Governor…’

‘Grandpa, don’t worry, what we spoke about is going to be public knowledge now. Let them keep the tape, it won’t be much use to them,’ said David, putting his hand on his great-grandfather’s shoulder.

‘Are you sure, David? If we do that, they’ll be after you,’ whispered George in David’s ear.

‘Yes, I’m sure, and I know about all the dangers. But this is my mission.’

‘OK, then, if that’s what you want… Mr. Carlson, if you like you can ask your boss to call my office tomorrow, in case he wants to know anything about my great-grandson. But I don’t think he’ll be bothered about it.’

‘Yes, Mr. Governor, I’ll tell him.’

‘Let’s go, David, you must be tired. Let’s go home.’

George and David went up to the next floor in the elevator. They came out in the main lobby of the airport where the governor’s bodyguards were waiting for him. As it was Christmas time, the area was packed with people walking in all directions, with suitcases and trolleys. The airport was chaotic because a snowstorm had delayed many flights. When they had walked a little way, David saw a girl of about twelve, sitting with her parents on a bench in the waiting area. The girl was in a wheelchair, paralyzed, only being able to move her head and a few fingers. But she was watching calmly as desperate and harassed people rushed hither and thither. David was touched at the sight of that pretty blonde girl, unable to move while her sisters played in front of her. The girl and her parents noticed that David was staring at her and that he slowed down when he saw her. Defensively, thinking it was one more prejudiced person, the girl’s parents accosted him:

‘Why are you staring at our daughter, haven’t you ever seen a child like that? What do you want?’ said the girl’s father, which made David stop and then walk slowly towards him. George stopped where he was and watched.

‘I’m sorry, sir, I just felt that your daughter is someone with a big heart. Hi, kid, what’s your name?’ asked David, kneeling down to be on a level with the girl.

‘My name’s Amy, what’s yours?’

‘I’m David. Pleased to meet you, Amy. You’re very pretty, did you know that?’

‘Thanks. You’re not bad-looking either.’

‘No way. Something wrong with your eyes.’

The girl’s parents didn’t know how to react to David. Other people looked at their daughter with pity or pretended they couldn’t see her. David was different; he had gone up to her and started a conversation. They saw they had been unfair to him, thinking he was another bigot.

‘Amy, tell me something, are you happy?’

‘Yes, I’m very happy,’ she answered shyly.

‘Do you believe in Jesus Christ?’

‘Yes, Jesus Christ is our Savior.’

‘If I told you that Jesus Christ could make you better and get you out of that wheelchair, would you believe me?’

‘Hey, boy, wait a minute, don’t you go saying those things to my daughter. You’ll give her false hopes. We’ve got problems enough as it is. Get out of here,’ said the girl’s father, getting up.

‘Take it easy, honey, let him talk to her. He was talking about Jesus, it could be good for her self-esteem,’ said the woman, holding on to her husband.

‘I’m sorry, Sir, don’t worry, I won’t do your daughter any harm. I just want to help her.

‘So, Amy, do you believe that Jesus can help you make yourself better?’

‘Yes, I think that if anyone’s going to make me better it’ll be Jesus. But I don’t fret about that, I’m happy the way I am and there are people needier than me.’

‘It’s precisely because you think that way that you deserve to be cured.’

The girl’s father couldn’t contain himself; he was ready to give David a good thumping.

‘Can I say a prayer for you, Amy? Can I put my hands on you?’

‘Sure you can.’

David put his right hand on Amy’s head, and the left one on her chest. He closed his eyes and began to concentrate, as if he was praying silently.

‘That’s it. In a little while you’ll be able to play with your sisters.’

‘I don’t get it.’

‘In a little while you will get up and go and play with your sisters.’

‘I´m going to get better?’

‘Yes, in a few minutes you’ll be better.’

David retreated a couple of steps. Amy’s father, seeing that the strange young man had withdrawn, started to calm down. David smiled at Amy and, just as she was beginning to return his smile, she felt funny and gave her mother a scared look, as if she didn’t understand what was happening.

‘Mum, I’ve got pins and needles all over, I feel weird,’ Amy said to her mother, who saw that her fingers were moving more than normal. ‘Mummy, help, help me. It’s hurting.’

‘What have you done to my daughter, you bastard?’ shouted the father, heading towards his daughter to try to help.

‘Don’t worry, it’s her bones and muscles growing back,’ replied David.

Amy’s bones and muscles were regenerating themselves. Years and years of atrophy were being undone in a matter of seconds. Amy was wrapped in thick clothing because of the cold, and it was impossible to see what was really happening.

‘Ahhhh!!!’ Amy let out a loud cry which could be heard all over the airport.

The people passing by stopped at once, to see what was going on.

The blonde girl started struggling and screaming and crying and her parents backed off in fear. They were desperate and started calling for a doctor. With all her struggles the wheelchair toppled over and Amy fell out. She went on struggling, twisting with pain and screaming. After a while the little twelve-year-old stopped struggling and lay quietly on the floor, looking at the people around her who were aghast at the scene.

‘Amy, look at me. It’s me, David.’ Amy turned her head to look at him.

Her parents didn’t want to touch their daughter; they were too frightened of causing her more pain.

‘Amy, now get up and walk,’ said David forcefully.

The girl looked again fearfully at the people around her, who were beginning to say the boy was mad, to be saying such a thing to a tetraplegic. Some people were laughing and filming the scene on their cell phones. The girl heard what David said, and then she rested one of her hands on the floor and slowly started pushing herself up. The people round Amy couldn’t understand what was happening. The ones who were laughing automatically placed their hands over their mouths, their expressions changing. Gradually Amy lifted herself up. Her parents went to support her, seeing that she couldn’t get her balance, as she had never walked before or even stood up. As Amy was straightening up, with the help of her parents, the crowd began to draw back. Some were crying with emotion. Others, unbelieving, thought that it was a piece of theatre or a trick. The parents started crying, as did her other two sisters, when they saw that she was beginning to try taking her first steps towards David.

‘My God, it’s a miracle. I can’t believe my eyes,’ cried Amy’s mother.

Shouts were heard of “Miracle! Miracle!” People were talking to each other and recounting what was happening to the people who were further away and couldn’t see. John F. Kennedy Airport came to a standstill. The news spread rapidly and everyone wanted to get close to Amy and her family. The whole place was in uproar.

‘Thank you, David. You were right when you said Jesus would make me better. Thank you, thank you so much.’ Amy had tears in her eyes and tried to walk to David, in her awkward way.

‘No need to thank me, Amy. You deserve it. It wasn’t Jesus who healed you, it was your faith and confidence in what I told you.’

‘My boy, forgive me for misjudging you. Please pardon me,’ said Amy’s father, throwing himself at David’s feet.

‘Don’t worry, sir. I think from now on you’ll think twice before judging a person.’

‘What’s your name, son?’

‘My name is David. I have to go. Look after your daughter, please, she’s very special.’

‘Thank you, David, thank you very much. God bless you. God bless you.’ Amy’s father couldn’t hide his emotion.

David turned and walked towards George, who had tears in his eyes. As he walked the crowd parted in front of him, and some of them wanted to touch him. The sound of clapping started echoing through the lobby. They all clapped for David, shouting

and whistling.

David Griffin had begun his mission. Even he could hardly believe what had just happened. Now his feat would become common knowledge throughout the world. People would always talk of him as the second one to perform a miracle of this dimension. His mission was to persuade people that he came in the name of Jesus, to save them and to prepare them for the great final battle between good and evil and, later, for the return of Jesus Christ.

CHAPTER 30

Griffin Residence, New York, 26th December 2008

George and David went up in the private elevator of the building where the family lived in New York. Before going home, George had dropped in at his office to pick up some documents he wanted to show David. The elevator came to a stop inside the apartment and when the door opened they could see the living room and a big screen on which George watched films. As soon as the elevator reached the top floor the two of them saw the family gathered around the screen. As they got out they could hear the news on CNN:

‘People from around the world watched today, a short while ago, as one of the greatest miracles man has seen was performed. A little girl called Amy Stanford, just twelve years old, tetraplegic since the age of five, was cured in a few minutes by a boy identified only as David. Witnesses filmed the incident and the girl’s parents confirmed that she was almost totally paralyzed, and could only move her head and two fingers of her left hand. According to other witnesses, the boy who performed the miracle was seen leaving the airport with the governor of New York, George Griffin. Various versions of the scene were posted on YouTube and have been watched by more than two million people worldwide. Amy Stanford was rushed to hospital, from where she is going to talk live to reporter Kelly Chapman.

‘Kelly, do you have anything new on the Amy case?’

‘Jack, the doctor who examined Amy has just given a press conference. Here’s what he said.’

‘Amy is in good health, but I must say that, having seen her medical records, I would not have believed she could be cured, as her paralysis was caused by a serious trauma to the spine. The tests we have carried out today show no sign of any old injury to Amy’s spine. In addition, Amy suffered from type 1 diabetes, and so far no trace of any sort of diabetes has been found in her blood. Scientifically speaking, what took place is impossible and nothing comparable has been recorded in the history of medicine. Amy will remain under observation for the next twenty-four hours.’

‘Doctor, do you think this could have been a miracle?’

‘My dear girl, I have been an atheist since the age of twelve, but I have to say that if this Amy is the same Amy described in her previous medical history, then it truly was a miracle.’

‘Jack, you can see the crowd of people here wanting to see the girl. There are dozens here who want to meet the girl who has been healed. The police have been called to control the crowds, as they are blocking all the traffic in front of the hospital. So I should make it clear that Amy is not receiving visitors and people should stay at home. Please don’t come to the hospital as you will just worsen the traffic jams and block the ambulances. Now back to you Jack at the CNN studios.’

‘Thank you, Kelly, it really does look as though a miracle has happened. What’s intriguing us now is that the boy was with the governor and where they went to. Our team will continue investigation and we’ll be back at any moment with more news.’

When the news report finished, David’s grandfather Thomas heard a sound from the corridor and turned to look. He was still in shock with the news, when suddenly the boy appeared.

‘My God, David, is it really you?’

‘Yes, it’s me, and you are…?’

‘It’s me, David, your grandfather Thomas…’

‘Hello Grandpa, I remember you…’ Hardly had David finished speaking when Thomas took him in a tight embrace. All the family started crying and hugging David, who was being crushed.

‘Easy, people, let him breathe. You’ll have plenty of time for hugs,’ said George, trying to pull them away.

‘David, how come you’re here?’ Thomas was emotional.

David sat down in one of the armchairs and the others sat round him, waiting to hear what he had to say.

‘David, you can tell us everything. We’re family, everyone knows your story,’ said George, trying to calm David who was also emotional at seeing his loved ones again.

‘The press keeps ringing for information about you. They saw you leaving the airport together and they want to know who you are. I never believed in those miracles everyone says Jesus did, but now that you’re doing it too I have no more doubts,’ said Thomas.

‘David, don’t worry. Thomas was always a sort of Doubting Thomas; he needs to see to believe,’ said David’s grandmother.

‘Naturally, I’m a scientist; I work on the basis of analyzing real data.’

David took several hours to tell them what had happened to him since the 9/11 attacks and up to the recent episode when he was taken on board the spaceship.

‘The only conclusion from all this, then, is that Jesus really was an alien and that we humans are hybrids, with a mixture of DNA from aliens and monkeys. My God, now it all makes sense. Look, father, I always used to say that the stories told by the various religions were pure fantasy. But in fact the ancient gods were nothing more than beings from another planet, much more highly evolved than us,’ concluded Thomas, amazed at everything he had been hearing.

‘So, David, what’s next?’ asked George.

‘Now I’ve got to reveal myself to the world. Tell them I’m a clone of Jesus and that I’m here on earth to prepare people for his return, as well as for Satan’s comeback.’

‘No, David. If you say you’re a clone of Jesus they’ll know I did the cloning. I’ll be crucified,’ said Thomas excitedly.

‘Don’t worry, grandpa, the cloning will be just a detail compared to all the rest that’s going to happen. No one will crucify you for that; on the contrary, you might even get the Nobel prize for carrying out the first cloning of a human being, especially as it’s a clone of

Jesus Christ.’

‘The first alien cloning, you mean.’

‘That’s right, but with a human spirit,’ answered David, laughing at the remark.

‘Grandpa George, I’ll need someone to go with me and help me with everything. I’m going to start taking the message to the whole world, and I need someone to liaise with the press, to arrange interviews, that sort of thing.’

‘Of course, David. We’ll help you with everything you need. I’ll arrange right away for two bodyguards to take care of you 24/7.’

‘Do you think a TV station will want to interview me?’ asked David.

‘Don’t be so modest, David, of course they will. We’ll make up a team to look after everything. All the TV stations will be falling over each other to have you as a guest.’

‘David, can you cure as many people as you want?’ asked the boy’s grandfather.

‘No, grandpa, only the ones with positive energy, the kind-hearted.’

‘And how do you know who they are?’

‘I sense people’s energy, and I can spot good people and bad people. I’ve always had the feeling, but I never took much notice of it. Galzu helped me use the gift. But I can’t cure many people in a day, just a few. The healing is nothing more than the transfer of energy; to do it many times in a short space of time would exhaust me. I plan to use my energy at strategic moments and in places where there are a lot of people. It’s not that I want to make an exhibition of myself, but if I do what they call a miracle when no one is there to see, they won’t believe in it. My mission, apart from preparing for Jesus’ return, is to try to change the hearts of bad people and bring them over to our side. That’s done through the emotions, and healing people and even raising people from the dead touches the emotions: people will start to believe and to have faith and so will begin to follow me and behave well.

‘What I am going to tell you now is very important: Satan’s followers are creating a weapon that will wipe out a large part of the earth’s population. It’s a biological weapon, a virus they plan to spread throughout the world. Enki’s soldiers, on the other hand, are trying to avoid the extermination of the human race. Satan will return to this world very soon and he will try to get people on to his side. He will be a great leader, he will do away with famine in many places, and he will put an end to many wars, but behind all that his real intention is to make people like him and fall for him. By the time that happens he will have enslaved part of the population and he will eliminate another part. We shall probably have a Third World War between the countries that support Satan and those that support Jesus. In the bible the Third World War is called Armageddon. This war will destroy a good part of the population; and then Jesus will return from Nibiru to bring peace to men.

‘However, we’ll have another problem after that. Some tens of years later the planet of the Anunnaki will be very close to earth, and that will cause great natural disasters here. There will be thousands of tsunamis, volcanoes erupting, and the earth’s nucleus will slip – which will alter the position of the poles and so make life on earth unsupportable for a long time. That’s why Jesus is preparing a great fleet of ships to take off the planet all the animals and all the good people. My hope is to make the evil people good, as we want to save as many human beings as possible. Enki’s scientists – I mean Jesus’ – have invented a device that can measure the energy of bodies. When the ships arrive, this device will tell us who is good and should be saved, and who is evil and should be left on earth to die.

‘In fact, since Jesus’ first coming, the plan was exactly that: to take words of love and goodness to the people, to ask them to pass the message to their children and grandchildren, and to convince them to be good and to deserve salvation.’

‘But, David, what about people who have already died?’ asked Thomas.

‘The human body is composed of energy. When it stops working, that energy leaves the body, wanders the earth for a time and then goes to a parallel universe. When a child is conceived, it needs this energy to develop and to be born. That’s when the energy that once was in another body returns to our dimension. It’s what we all know as reincarnation. The energy is as it were the spirit, and it carries in itself everything that was done in the previous life: if the person was good, the energy is good; if the person was evil, the energy is evil. In short, the energy is men’s spirit. Many of them are by nature bad; I mean they will be bad in all the lives they pass through. Others, depending on the environment they’re born in, can become good people, and then the energy is healed. That too is the influence of the environment in which they live. For example, if a child is born to parents with positive energy, it tends to attract positive energy towards it; and the opposite also happens: parents with negative energy can pass it on to their offspring. But there are many factors at play.’

‘And what happens after these people are brought to Jesus?’

‘They will go to Nibiru, which we know as heaven. There they will go through a process which makes them more or less immortal: their body cells will not age any more, and they will only die if someone kills them or they suffer an accident. These people will spend around a thousand years on Nibiru, which is the time it will take for earth to recover from the disasters. Then they will return here once more.’

All the family listening to him were astonished at what David had told them. They started to rethink their lives and a strong feeling of love took hold of them all, to think that they were part of something really big.

‘Well, people, it’s late, we must let David rest. Tomorrow will be a very tiring day. Let’s meet at breakfast and continue our chat. We’ll make plans about what to do next,’ said George, making them all get up and taking David to one of the guest rooms.

CHAPTER 31

Monaco, 27th December 2008

The banker Benjamin Uggae was in one of his mansions, in Monaco, when he saw on the television the news of the boy who had performed a miracle. He jumped up out of his chair, unable to believe his eyes. Benjamin was quite old now and his heart began to beat quicker and he felt pins and needles in his arm. ‘Oh, no! Not a heart attack just now!’ he thought, trying to calm himself down and fumbling in the drawer of his desk for his pills. He took two of them, sat down slowly in the armchair and little by little felt himself getting better. After a few minutes he was back to normal and he picked up the phone and dialed an overseas number.

‘Arnold, are you watching the news?’

‘No, Mr. Uggae, I’m out of the house.’

‘The bloody boy’s turned up. He’s there in the States and healing people to get himself noticed.’

‘So it’s true then. The boy is really a clone of Jesus!’

‘Did you doubt it? How else do you think he survived the attacks?’

‘And now, what are we going to do?’

‘Keep on his tail. He’s sure to have bodyguards, as well as Galzu’s soldiers who will be watching from a distance. Be careful.’

‘What city’s he in, sir?’

‘He’s in New York. Go there at once. That damned boy is going to upset all our plans.’

‘Yes, sir, I’ll be in touch the moment I have any news.’

Benjamin Uggae was beside himself. If David upset his plans he could be severely punished. After all his father had left him in charge of readying everything for Enlil’s return and domination of earth. There was no doubt David was a powerful weapon that threatened his family’s plans. ‘If that boy’s not stopped he can ruin everything. But, now I come to think of it, I can use this against Enki, against Jesus. Jesus himself said that many false prophets would arise in his name. All I have to do is to make those stupid humans believe he is a false prophet. I must think of a way to do that… I’ve got it!’

Benjamin picked up the phone and called a number with the Vatican area code.

‘This is Benjamin Uggae. I’d like to speak to Cardinal Felix.’

The assistant transferred the call to the cardinal’s office, and he answered on the first ring. Few people had that number, and if someone was calling him it was sure to be a person of importance to the Catholic Church.

‘Hello, Cardinal Felix speaking.’ The cardinal spoke Italian with a German accent.

‘Cardinal, this is Benjamin Uggae.’

‘Mr. Uggae, to what do I owe the honor of this call?’

‘Have you by any chance seen the news recently?’

‘I do not watch television, but I was informed about what happened. I was expecting you to call.’

‘And you’re not worried?’

‘We have already sent a detective to investigate the girl who was healed. I think we’re dealing with a charlatan, a trick of some sort.’

‘I don’t think so. But I’m calling to ask you to do something about it. My idea is that you should make the Pope go public with a statement that this is a false prophet, like all the other ones. Do everything you can to avoid the Church recognizing this miracle or any others he may perform. Don’t spare any effort to cover up everything the boy does.’

‘Mr. Uggae, there is just two of us cardinals, I don’t think we have so much influence over the Pope. We can advise him, but the final decision is his. We will do everything in our power. And behind the scenes we will do what we can to discredit this inferior miracle-worker, that is if he does turn up again.’

‘Cardinal Felix, I don’t think I made myself completely clear. You must achieve the impossible to discredit this boy. Make the Pope support you, or His Holiness will end up like Albino Luciani, who refused to obey the Illuminati’s orders. I’ll be watching the Church’s moves closely, and I hope you won’t disappoint me. You know what happens when someone disappoints me, don’t you?’

The cardinal broke out in a cold sweat and began to stammer:

‘Mr. Uggae, p-please, understand m-my position. I’m prepared to give my life for the order, but I can’t do what’s beyond my power, at least not officially. I’ll do everything I can. Unofficially, of course.’

‘Very good. I have a trip to Japan planned. I leave tomorrow and I’ll be back in two weeks. When I get back I’ll call you again to find out what you’ve done. If necessary we’ll get rid of this Pope and put you in his place.’

‘I understand very well, sir. I’ll start at once. Goodbye.’

Cardinal Felix and Cardinal Everaldo were two members of the Illuminati who had been infiltrated into the Catholic Church. In fact the Illuminati had its members in nearly all the world’s important institutions. Many of them had been Popes and it would not take much for Uggae to eliminate the current head of the Church and have one of the Cardinals of his order replace him. His method was intimidation. To make sure his orders were obeyed, all he had to do was to send a message to the other cardinals, saying that a new Pope should be elected, and then kill a member of each cardinal’s family. Benjamin Uggae was responsible for the death of Albino Luciani, Pope John Paul I, who was in power for only one month. Albino refused to take orders from Benjamin Uggae, and so it didn’t take long for him to be killed. However the Catholic Church’s influence had been waning as the years went by, and it had been a long time since Uggae had asked for anything from the Church, until now. With the Church’s help in discrediting David’s “miracles”, Uggae still had a chance until it was time for Enlil’s release. And that time was very near.

CHAPTER 32

United States of America, 27th January 2009

It was a Tuesday and until then, David had stayed shut up in his great-grandfather’s house in New York. He was getting ready for a formal presentation to the whole world; and he had decided that the best way to do this would be through interviews on television channels and other media outlets. David had invitations from all over the world, but he wanted his first interview to be on the Oprah Winfrey Show, as she was a woman he admired and he felt had positive energy. Added to which her program had one of the highest audience ratings on the planet. David knew too that many of the invitations were intended to test him or even to make fun of what he had done, but this wasn’t the case with Oprah.

David arrived at the TV studio in good time, accompanied by his grandfather Thomas. There was a big crowd waiting at the entrance. People from all over wanted to see David. They were eagerly trying to get close to him. As soon as Thomas and his grandson entered the building they were welcomed by the producers and taken to a comfortable dressing-room. A few minutes later one of the producers called David on to the platform. His grandfather was to sit in the front row of the audience.

Oprah was saying:

‘Videos of him have had more than two billion hits the world over. The video of him healing a tetraplegic girl has deeply moved people throughout the planet. We found out recently that this boy, who is only sixteen, is the great-grandson of New York’s Governor George Griffin. Come on up, David Griffin!’

David crossed the floor with his head down, shy and retiring as ever. On the big screen behind the presenter they were showing the video of him healing the girl Amy.

The audience rose to applaud David as he entered. The producers tried to quieten the audience down, but they couldn’t stop the clapping, which went on for more than two minutes. There were many people crying.

‘Hello, David. Welcome, and thank you for accepting my invitation.’ Oprah gave David a tight hug.

‘Thank you, Ms Winfrey, I’m the one to thank you for inviting me.’

‘Please call me Oprah.’

‘OK, thanks, Oprah.’ David gave a big smile, and the ice was broken.

‘David, tell me, the whole world wants to know how you healed that little girl, and if it was really you who did it. People are in two minds, and even the Catholic Church has had its say. It says it investigated the case and found no evidence of a miracle.’

‘If I may, Oprah, I’d like to take advantage of being here to reveal some stuff. What I reveal may shock people and many of them won’t believe what I’m going to say.’

‘Please, David, the stage is yours. Reveal away.’

‘Well, as some of you know, my grandfather, sitting there in the front row, is a great scientist. He isn’t famous only because when my mother died he made up his mind to give up research. But in 1993 he decided to create a clone. I am that clone.’

‘A clone? My God! How come, David? Tell us more… You’re a clone of who?’

‘Who before me healed people the way I did?’

‘Well, as far as I know, before you, only Jesus Christ.’

‘Exactly so. I am a clone of Jesus Christ.’

The audience was puzzled. They began to mutter to each other and Oprah’s expression was one of incredulity, wondering if she was dealing with a madman.

‘David, you can’t be serious. Let’s say you’re telling the truth. Where could your grandfather have found the genetic material to clone you?’

‘Let me explain. My grandfather’s whole family is descended from Mary Magdalene, who was Jesus’ wife and had a daughter with him. When Jesus was crucified, Mary was three months pregnant with a baby girl who was to be called Sarah. At that time an angel appeared to Joseph of Arimathaea and gave him a cylinder. He said he should fill it with the blood of Jesus and that our Lord would be reborn from that blood. He also said that the cylinder should stay with the family of Jesus, and that Christ would be reborn from the womb of one of his descendants. Joseph of Arimathaea hid the cylinder in the chalice that Jesus used at the Last Supper. People know this chalice as the Holy Grail. Sixteen years ago the cylinder was opened and my grandfather used the blood in it to create the clone of Jesus. The embryo was brought to term in his daughter Sarah’s womb. Sarah was my mother and she died in the 9/11 attacks. In short, the Holy Grail was the chalice that concealed the blood and the lineage of Jesus. His clone could only be born from the womb of a member of the family, and in this way Christ’s line has been preserved till now.’

‘My God, David, but that story’s quite surreal, it’s unbelievable! And where are the chalice and the cylinder now?’

‘Here they are,’ answered David, taking the chalice with the broken handle and the gold and silver cylinder out of a small bag he was carrying, and handed them to the presenter. ‘This is the chalice and the cylinder.’

‘Good Lord, it really is very like the chalice of the Last Supper! I don’t know what to say. So, are you saying you’re Jesus and that you possess all his powers?’

‘No, I’m not Jesus, I’m David. Let’s say I’m Jesus’ twin brother, but born in another age. And Jesus still exists.’

‘But David, what’s the point of all this? Why did your grandfather clone Jesus and why did you heal that girl?’

‘Oprah, I have a mission on earth and that mission is to prepare mankind for Jesus’ return. The healing serves only so that people can see I am speaking the truth and so that they will listen to what I say. If I turned up at the door of your studio claiming to be a clone of Jesus, you’d have me put away, wouldn’t you?’

‘We certainly would. In any other situation you wouldn’t have a hope of being believed.’

‘The same thing happened with Jesus. He needed people to believe in him, so he healed them. And he only healed those who really deserved it, like me.’

‘And how can you tell who deserves to be healed and who doesn’t?’

‘That’s easy. By the person’s energy. Everyone possesses energy. In fact everything in the world and in the universe consists of energy, and I can feel people’s energy. If the person has done good things during his or her lifetime, if they were good, their energy is automatically good; if they were evil, they will have stored up negative energy.’

‘Nevertheless, millions of people need healing…’

‘Yes, but there’s no way I can heal them all. On the other hand, if they have really led good lives, they will be healed when Jesus returns. All I’m doing is anticipating a few cures.’

‘David, explain to us how the cure is done. Do you have special powers? Is it something you use?’

‘Remember that I said the whole universe consists of energy? Well, then. All I do is transfer my energy to the sick person. My energy is stronger, and it makes their body start producing chemical reactions that give them the ability to heal themselves. In fact any human being can cure himself; the problem is that most of them don’t realize they have that ability and they depend on medicines or herbs.’

‘David, could you heal someone here today?’

‘Of course. I see that you have invited three people who are paralyzed and four blind people.’

‘Actually we didn’t invite them. They signed up to take part in the program like everyone else, so it wasn’t arranged. Don’t think we’re trying to test you. Perform a cure only if you feel this is what you should do.’

‘Right, Oprah. As I said, however, it depends on the person’s own energy. That’s how I know if someone deserves to be healed or not. Among the sick people here only three deserve to get well. The others don’t, because they don’t have positive energy.’

‘Could you point out which of the three in wheelchairs can’t be healed, and why?’

‘The why I couldn’t tell you now. All I know is that I can’t heal two of them, the two on the left, the bald man and the woman. Look, I’m not saying you’re bad people, nothing of the sort. You could be good, normal people, but you just haven’t accumulated enough positive energy to merit a cure,’ said David, indicating the two in wheelchairs, a man and a woman who sat there with closed expressions, indignant at the boy’s accusations.

‘Well, let’s talk to them. Give them the microphone.’

‘What do you do, sir?’ asked David.

‘I’m retired and I had an accident. But I’m a good person, I’ve never hurt anyone or killed anyone.’

‘Do you have any vices?’

‘Yes, I’ve been a smoker for more than thirty years and I was once an alcoholic.’

‘Then it must be that. Look, cigarette and drink are bad things that attack our bodies. People who smoke or drink or use any type of drug are slowly killing themselves and this makes their energy negative. But there is a solution. If you give up your vices now, your energy will get stronger and when the time comes, you will be saved. There’s still time.’

‘Got it, David. And what about this lady, let’s see what she’s got to say.’

‘Oprah, I don’t smoke, I don’t drink, I’ve always treated people well, I don’t understand why he says I don’t have positive energy,’ said the woman, who was angry about David’s accusation.

‘You work or used to work in your lifetime? Doing what?’ asked David, quietly and unassumingly.

‘Before my accident I worked at a refrigeration plant.’

‘What did you do there?’

‘I helped slaughter the cattle and the chickens.’

‘That explains her case, too, Oprah. She used to murder animals. That’s a very serious thing. I was surprised when she said she was a good person, because her energy is very sluggish. A good person doesn’t kill animals. Anyone who makes a living from that and isn’t remorseful will build up a very negative charge of energy.’

‘But, David, she did that to feed people.’

‘Yes, I understand. But very few people, even those who don’t like animals, are capable of killing them. She could do it and she made it her job.’

‘Do you mean to say that people who eat meat have negative energy?’

‘Not altogether. Most people eat meat because they have been used to it since they were small. These people kill involuntarily and think of the meat they eat as an industrial food product and not as a dead animal. See here, Oprah, what I mean is that people who mistreat animals, or kill animals, are bad people with negative energy, even if they treat other people well. I say again, mistreating animals, which are living beings like us, is as bad as mistreating a person, and what makes it worse is that they are defenseless against us. You can be sure that people who treat animals badly will never enter the kingdom of Jesus, they will not be saved and they will burn on earth together with Satan. There are many ways of mistreating an animal, not just by hurting it or killing it. If you buy a pet and then abandon it or give it away you are treating it badly. If you buy an animal and then leave it tied up in a tiny space or on a chain, that too is ill-treatment. People are mistreating animals when they make slaves of them or put them in cages for other people’s entertainment. People who wear fur coats or leather shoes are mistreating animals - only cows’ leather should be used, as the animal has already been slaughtered to serve as food. So people who do any of these things are building up negative energy in themselves, and they’ll never be saved.’

‘Fur coats, David? It’s just as well I don’t wear them!’

‘Yes, fur coats. I can’t credit that people wear fur coats to dress themselves up, at the expense of pure creatures’ suffering. It’s one thing to use animal skins to keep warm, like people did in the olden days; it’s quite another to use furs for ostentation or beautification. It’s a total absurdity.’

‘Got it, David. Truly, people who mistreat animals are hateful – I always say so on my program.’

‘And Oprah, we can’t forget people who have birds in a cage at home. Or even reptiles in aquariums. This is wrong. No one has the right to deprive an animal of its freedom, whatever type of animal it is, even an insect. And it’s wrong to use animals to test cosmetics, and to use them just anyhow as guinea-pigs. It’s one thing to test for diseases, and quite another to use animals in experiments that don’t bring any good to mankind.

‘There are many examples, but it all begins at home, with pets. If you want to have the chance to be saved, treat your pets very well, just like you would want to be treated, treat them as if they were people, humans. No human being is any better than an animal on earth. Would you like it if a superior race started killing humans to eat? How would you feel about that? We have thousands of types of foodstuffs not made from animals, so why do you need to eat meat? Today there is meat made from soya, just as good as animal meat.’

‘Are you a vegetarian, David?’

‘Yes, definitely.’

‘But what about milk products and other animal derivatives?’

‘I see no harm in consuming them. These days dairy cows are very well treated. It’s all a question of buying things from a reputable source, of knowing where they come from – in the case of milk, you should know if it’s from a farm that mistreats its animals or if it’s from one of those where the cows listen to classical music and are given massages, for example. Everything’s relative. As long as what you consume isn’t produced through an animal’s suffering, then you can eat it.’

‘Not to mention that a meat-free diet is healthier.’

‘Indeed. Gandhi said once that the greatness of a nation is measured by the way it treats its animals. I would rephrase that and say that the goodness of a person is measured by the way that person treats animals.’

‘Right, then let’s get back to healing. The third one, the other man in a wheelchair, can you heal him?’

‘Yes, he’s already healed.’

‘Already healed?’ Oprah’s eyes widened and she looked at the young man in the wheelchair.

‘From the moment I got here didn’t you feel pins and needles in your legs?’ David asked the paralytic.

‘Yes, I did. I feel it a little from time to time, but today it was stronger.’

‘OK then, as you’re wearing long trousers you won’t have noticed it, but your muscles started developing and now you can walk. Try moving your legs.’

All the studio cameras were on the young man in the wheelchair and the audience got to its feet to see if he could really move

his legs.

The young man made an effort to move his legs and little by little they started to react. He started sobbing when he saw what his legs were doing. The audience was stunned at the sight and many of them start to cry.

‘What’s your name?’ David asked the young man, who was tall and thin, looking to be about thirty years old.

‘My name’s Richard,’ the other replied, weeping.

‘Richard, you are healed. GET UP and WALK towards me,’ said David in a forceful tone.

The young man supported himself on the arms of the wheelchair to try and get up, and when they saw he was having difficulty the producers went to help him. Then he stood up and started walking towards David. He could walk by himself, slowly. Oprah was open-mouthed and crying at the sight. The audience was silent, not believing its eyes. The viewers reacted the same way – millions of people were silent, watching live what David had just done. There was a commotion both in and outside the Harpo studios. All the people were crying, shouting and hugging each other in their emotional state. David got up and the young man gave him a long, tight hug. Then the young man got down on his knees in front of David and began to kiss his feet. David was embarrassed and leant down and pulled the young man up.

‘My God, David, you really are who you say you are,’ said Oprah. I’ve got no doubt about that now. I’m honored to be the first to welcome you. Our audience ratings are the highest in the program’s history. Thank you!’

‘Oprah, to wrap this up, let me say that two of the four blind people can now see. All they have to do is open their eyes and take off their dark glasses.’

At once everyone turned towards the four blind people who were sitting side by side in the second row. A girl and a young man twisted their heads round and started touching the things in front of them; they could see again and they were crying. Realizing that they could really see the audience erupted. They wept. Oprah wept. The tumult inside the studios redoubled. People at home couldn’t believe what they were seeing. The blind had had their sight restored.

‘I know your sight may still be a bit cloudy, rather foggy. That’s normal, your eyes have to get used to the light and everything.’

With the producers’ help, the two of them went up to David to thank him for what he had done, embracing him and kissing him.

‘But David, how did you do that without touching them? In the YouTube video you touch the girl Amy. She appeared on my program and explained what had happened.’

‘This time, Oprah, the sickness wasn’t very serious, and the lesions weren’t bad, so I could direct my energy to them through my thoughts, during the course of the program. That was all it took to heal them. In Amy’s case the lesions were very serious, so it took a lot more energy to be able to heal her.’

‘God bless you, David. I’m sure no one has any more doubts about who you are and what your mission here is.’

‘That’s what I hope too, Oprah: that people believe in me. I hope they will follow me and realize that truly all I say will come to pass. We have set up an internet site where people can find out what is going on, and what is going to happen. We are setting up an order. It’s as if it was a new religion, but it isn’t really a religion, as people of other religions can take part without changing their beliefs. All that’s needed is for them to be good people, that they are thirsty for the truth, that they treat other people and animals well, and that they are keen to help. It’s an order that will unite people from all over the world, people who believe in Jesus, in the real Jesus that I will reveal to you, and that want to be a part of it. The order is called Arammu; and our website is arammu.org. All the people throughout the world who are accepted into the order of Arammu will be taking part in something very big. They will all be like brothers, and all the brothers will have as their mission to bring love to others and to humanity. Love: that’s what Arammu means in our mother language, the Sumerian tongue, the first language that humans learnt to communicate in.’

‘I want to see your website. As soon as the program’s over I’ll access arammu.org. David, I’d like to know if you can come to the program again tomorrow, to continue our chat, as our time’s up now.’

‘Of course I can. It’ll be an honor for me. So tomorrow I’ll be back and finish telling people what they need to know.’

‘Thank you, David. Thanks for accepting our invitation. That’s all for today, but tomorrow we’ll be back with David Griffin. Don’t miss it.’

CHAPTER 33

The Vatican, one hour later.

The broad corridors of the Apostolic Palace echoed a symphony of hurried steps which one by one went silent, as they entered a great hall at the end of a long corridor. As soon as there was silence, they heard the sound of a heavy wooden door slam shut and of a key turning. Several cardinals were meeting in the hall after getting an extraordinary summons from the Pope. In no time the hall was full, and all the cardinals and important people connected to the Pontiff were there for the meeting behind closed doors. The men took their places and the murmuring ceased as the Pope came in, accompanied by his personal secretary and the Vatican spokesman.

‘Father Vitorio has just shown me an interview on the internet, given an hour ago on a television program in the United States. I think many of you must have seen this interview,’ said the Pope, getting the meeting underway.

Most of the cardinals raised their hands in assent. The internet video had spread like a virus all through Vatican City.

‘I never thought to see anything of the sort in my lifetime. I have heard of miracles, but nothing compared to this. This is why we are here at this extraordinary meeting, to decide what to do,’ said the Pope in a worried tone.

‘Holy Father, before this meeting some of us were discussing the case. Some colleagues and I believe that we are dealing with a trickster. We think it’s no more than theater got up by this boy,’ said one of the cardinals, getting up.

‘Please sit down, Cardinal, don’t get excited. We have to think calmly about all this. How do you think that something shown on television could be a set-up? The program the boy was interviewed on is a serious one. I don’t think they would allow anything like that,’ retorted another cardinal who was seated beside the Pope.

‘And what if the people that boy said he had healed were his accomplices? How can we be sure?’ responded the first cardinal, and the muttering began again.

‘Gentlemen, gentlemen, calm down. I beg you, remain calm,’ said a third cardinal.

‘Brother, how can we explain the healing of that girl? We sent an investigator who confirmed that the child was really tetraplegic. And what if the boy is really telling the truth and he is truly a clone of Jesus?’ wondered another who was seated further to the rear.

‘Brothers, there is nothing in our documents to suggest that there might have been any trace of DNA in the chalice used by Jesus. We know that Jesus’ blood was collected in the wooden chalice, but even if it had spilt through some crack, it would still have been impossible to conserve the DNA,’ said one of the priests who was there.

‘To tell the truth, brother, that is not absolutely so,’ replied the Pope. ‘This fact isn’t known to you, but we have in our possession the DNA of Jesus.’

Everyone in the room was silent and frightened.

‘Could Your Holiness explain that?’

‘Do you remember that we managed to collect a fraction of the DNA of Jesus on one of the splinters of the cross, which has been in our possession for centuries?’ replied the Pope.

‘Yes, but the DNA extracted was partial. The chain was broken.’

‘That is so. But do you remember that we recovered the spear of destiny, that was in Hitler’s collection, after his death? It was left to us in a soldier’s will.’

‘We remember that, but no DNA was found on the spear.’

‘You are wrong, DNA was found. I too was unaware of this until I was ordained. It has been kept secret. Luckily the spear was very well preserved by the people who had possession of it over the centuries. On its handles some designs are carved and in the carvings we collected samples of Jesus’ DNA. The DNA was also partial, but by uniting the chains we obtained a complete one,’ said the Pope, and the news made everyone in the hall very excited.

‘But, Your Holiness, how could this be kept from us? This is an outrage. We should have access to this information,’ said one of the cardinals in amazement.

‘Calm yourself, brother, this information is very dangerous. If what we learnt from the DNA was generally known, we should have a lot of explaining to do.’

‘And what was discovered in the DNA, Holiness?’

‘My brothers, we learnt that the DNA we found is not human, nor belonging to any race known on this planet,’ said the Pope, causing more uproar in the hall.

‘Then those documents that we keep so well concealed about the origin of Jesus are actually true? Jesus is a being from another world?’

‘True, brother. The interpretation given to the secret documents, which were nearly destroyed, was right. Jesus is not of this world. And if that were to become public knowledge nowadays, they would say that Jesus is an alien or something of the sort. That would put the Holy Church at risk,’ explained the Pope; and then one of the cardinals began to speak.

‘Excuse me for interrupting, Your Holiness. Even if DNA was found inside the Holy Grail, it seems unlikely that at the time the boy was conceived anyone would have been able to clone a being with DNA which doesn’t even belong to this world. Man only succeeded in cloning a mammal in 1996.’

‘The brother is correct. And for this reason I believe that this boy is a fraud,’ concluded the Pope. ‘Now we have to find a way of discrediting him, or else the Church may suffer harm.’

‘Holy Father, our problem is solved. All we have to do it to tell the world that we have the DNA of Jesus in our possession and confront the boy with it. Make him undergo a test and this will prove he is a fake,’ one cardinal proposed.

‘And what if the boy agrees to take the test? The world will know that Jesus’ DNA isn’t human,’ retorted another.

‘I don’t think the boy will accept. He won’t want to run the risk of being discredited. He will invent some excuse, saying that he doesn’t need to prove anything to anyone, as various fraudsters we know about have done over the centuries when they were put to the test,’ the cardinal who had proposed the test answered back.

‘It is a very good idea, brother. In any case, we can insist on confidentiality from the people that do the DNA test. We will include in the contract that the laboratory may divulge only whether the DNA is the same as the boy’s or not, nothing more,’ said the Pope.

‘But, Your Holiness, the press will say that the DNA in our possession isn’t that of Jesus.’

‘Before we hand over the sample of DNA for the test, we will announce how it came into our possession and we will let the scientific community, without analyzing it, certify what we have and how we came by it,’ answered another cardinal.

‘It’s settled, then. It’s been announced that tomorrow the boy will be back on television. Get in touch with the producers of the program and tell them that we want to appear live, by video-conference, to make the proposal to the boy. But don’t let anyone know in advance, or he’ll be able to prepare for it. Father Vitorio, you will be responsible for the matter and you will be the one to speak live on the program. Keep me informed of everything that happens and tomorrow, after the transmission, we will meet again here in this hall,’ decreed the Pope. After giving the instructions he got up and left. After he had gone, tumult reigned again in the great hall.

Cardinals Felix and Everaldo, the two members of the Illuminati, looked at each other and exchanged smiles. They had got the Pope to adopt their plan and they were sure the boy would be discredited, just as the grand master of the Illuminati desired. The latter still had no idea of their plan, having merely ordered the men to do everything in their power, without specifying what this should be.

CHAPTER 34

The following day

There was a crowd of thousands in front of the Harpo studios, where David was to continue his interview. The police were called to control the crowd and to stop more people getting into the road in front of the studio. The neighboring blocks were full of people. Placards supporting David and opposing him transformed the neighborhood into a sea of multicolored banners. The noise was deafening. David’s supporters wrestled with those who were there to denounce him as the anti-Christ or as a false prophet. As a result of all the confusion, hours before David was due to return to the program, the production team contacted his grandfather and told him that they would send a helicopter to bring the boy to the recording studio. Watching television, David was frightened when he saw the sea of people gathered in wait for him.

Soon afterwards David was in one of the best dressing-rooms, with his grandfather and a girl cousin, waiting for the interview to start. He was calm and serene as always, unlike his grandfather who was a heap of nerves. His cousin, who was a second cousin and the same age as him, tried to soothe his grandfather. She was a beautiful girl called Ludmilla, and she was working with David with responsibility for the website they had set up. In spite of her very good looks and her innocent little girl manner, she was a well-known hacker in the underworld of the internet, though of course her family didn’t know this. Only seventeen, she had already hacked into the principal information systems of the world’s governments. David fell in love with her the first time he saw her. It was an unfamiliar feeling for him and he was still confused; and Ludmilla, though she too was in love with David, kept up a front as the tough girl who doesn’t fall for anyone. Even so David realized that his feelings were reciprocated.

When his grandfather had calmed down, one of the program’s producers knocked on the door of the dressing-room to tell them that the interview was about to start.

When David walked up on to the stage, the audience, who were different from the day before, gave him a standing ovation. Many of them wept with emotion at being in the same place as him, and he too began to cry, overcome at the reception.

‘A warm welcome back, David,’ announced Oprah Winfrey. ‘Just for the record, we have received many thousands of emails about yesterday’s program. Never in the history of the program have we had so many. The program was a great success. And I’ve just been told that more than 95% of television sets are tuned in to this channel. It’s a record audience for this hour of the day. We are also transmitting live over the internet, so people throughout the world are connected to our site in honor of this interview.’

A large number of people in the United States, having no access to television at that time of day, were watching over the internet. Huge screens erected specially throughout the country would also transmit the interview. The country had come to a halt to listen to what David had to say. Nothing like it had been seen since 9/11, when millions of Americans stopped to watch the reports of the attacks.

‘It’s good to know that people liked the interview. I hope to be able to clear up a few things today,’ said David, pleased with the news.

‘David, before we go on, the Vatican has contacted our production team and they want to make a proposal to you, live. What do you think of that?’

‘Of course, why not?’

‘Right then. Let’s get Father Vitorio of the Vatican live on the line; he’s going to talk to us over a video link. Father, can you hear us?’

‘Hello, Oprah. In the name of the Pope and of the entire Vatican, I thank you for making it possible for us to talk to David.’

‘I would remind you that this conference has been agreed to by David, and that nothing has been pre-arranged. Even we have no idea what you are going to say. Is that correct, father?’

‘Correct. We want to make a revelation and also a proposal to the boy.’

‘That’s fine, father, go ahead,’ said David, knowing that this was going to be some sort of attack.

‘I’ll tell the story briefly, as it’s a very long one and I know that a minute of time on your channel costs millions. As you know, when Jesus was crucified, a centurion called Longinus thrust a spear into his side, to make sure he was really dead, and a lot of blood flowed from the wound. Well, this spear was lost for many centuries. Many replicas of it were made and still exist in private collections and even in museums. However the real “spear of destiny”, as it came to be called, fell into the hands of Hitler. After the German dictator’s death, a soldier who belonged to our church stole the spear. When the soldier died some years later, he left the spear in his will to the Catholic Church. In fact according to his will we inherited a box with unknown contents. Inside the box was a spear which we realized could be the true spear of Longinus. Our scientists examined it and confirmed that it was the original, not just by dating it but also because on it they found traces of blood. More recently, with the advance of technology, we were able to identify the DNA of the blood on the spear. And so, as we have the DNA of Jesus, we would like to propose to young David that he should undergo a DNA test to prove what he is saying. Naturally, we don’t doubt his word, but the Church requires proof and I think the faithful and everyone in the world would also like to have this proof. What do you say, young man?’

‘Father, your proposal sounds a fair one. I accept, on condition that the test is done by a laboratory that has no connection with the Vatican,’ replied David calmly.

‘Of course, young man, no problem. If you wish we will let you choose the laboratory. But are you sure you want to do the test?’ The priest was getting uncomfortable, not having expected David to accept the proposal.

‘But of course I do. If you have Jesus’ DNA in your possession, this test will make the people who still have doubts about what I said yesterday, believe in me. And as you have the DNA you must also know that it isn’t human DNA, right?’

The priest broke out in a cold sweat. He hadn’t expected David to know that.

‘Ah… Ah… That I couldn’t tell you. I’m just the Vatican’s spokesman, I don’t know anything about the DNA results, I’m not a scientist,’ the priest broke off the conversation.

‘David, what do you mean, the DNA isn’t human?’ asked Oprah.

‘Yes, well, that’s the bit I wanted to talk about. Jesus isn’t human. Jesus is an extraterrestrial being, belonging to a much more highly evolved race than the human race, though very similar.’

‘You mean to say Jesus is an alien, a being from another planet, flying around in flying saucers?’

‘That’s exactly it. I’ll try and summarize the story. Jesus is like the incarnation of the being that created mankind. The being you call God turns up in some documents of Sumerian mythology with the name of Enki. He created human beings thousands of years ago. To be truthful, mankind was created to be the slaves of Enki’s race, the Anunnaki. The bible uses figurative language to describe nothing less than the genetic manipulation carried out by the Anunnakis, crossing their own DNA with that of a terrestrial being that walked on two legs. This being is today known as Homo habilis. From the mixture of its DNA with the alien DNA, Homo erectus had its origin. Then the mating of the Anunnakis with Homo erectus (described in Genesis, chapter 6, verse 4) created Neanderthal Man. Other crosses produced the first specimens of Homo sapiens. All these genetic experiments were intended to create a race of earthly beings which would do the manual labor that the Anunnakis refused to do. Later, Enki resolved to be reborn on earth to try to bring about mankind’s evolution and save it from destruction. And so Enki transferred his consciousness to a body on earth, the body of Jesus, which contained the same DNA as his own. Jesus was artificially inseminated into Mary, and when he reached a certain age, Enki transformed himself into Jesus. Jesus’ mission was to make people aware that they could only evolve if they behaved well, if they did good deeds and if they treated everyone with love. Otherwise mankind would destroy itself. Another objective of Enki’s was to convince people to pass the message of Christ down to their children until he should return, which is going to happen soon. When Jesus Christ returns, good people will be saved and will be taken to the planet of the beings that created us.’

‘My God, David, that’s a really fantastic story. I don’t know what to say.’

‘This is just a summary of the whole story. In time I will go into more detail. It has to do with my mission on earth. Jesus is near his return to earth, soon he will come back, and that’s why I have to prepare everybody. Jesus will arrive with a fleet of spaceships, coming from his planet of origin. These ships were seen in old times as archangels; the beings that came out of them were seen as angels.’

‘You mean to tell me then that God and the angels don’t exist?’

‘Look, what doesn’t exist is the concept of a supernatural God, creator of the heavens and the earth, and angels flying around on wings. What does really exist is a superior race with technology advanced enough to create other races and to travel through the universe. This superior race has the technology to create other races through genetic modification, a technique that humans too have now mastered. Don’t forget: no single God exists with powers to create a whole universe. The universe came into being by itself, with no need of a God. If a God had been needed to create the universe, what then would have been necessary for God to be created? The creator of the universe does not exist, but that doesn’t mean that people shouldn’t be good and follow the precepts of those who created them. I repeat, Jesus will come back to earth to save only those who deserve it, who are good and who contain positive energy. I say “save” because this world will soon be destroyed, as happened in remote ages gone by, before mankind existed. It was destroyed again by the flood and the time is coming again. It’s inevitable.’

‘And when will this be, David?’

‘That I cannot reveal. I don’t want to create panic. I also don’t want people to be good merely to save themselves, but because they want to be good from the bottom of their hearts. When the time comes, millions of ships from Enki’s planet will come to earth to take off all the animals and the deserving humans. Those who are not deserving will be destroyed together with the earth and together with Satan and his armies. The deserving ones will have their genetic codes altered to give them everlasting life, which I and the Anunnakis already possess. After a thousand years, when the earth has recovered from the disaster which overtook it, these humans will return at a new level of evolution.’

‘That’s marvelous, and I hope I shall be one of the people who are saved. So do you mean to say you are immortal, just like Jesus?’

‘I do hope so…’ replied David with a smile. ‘Yes, my body cells do not grow old, but I could die if I suffered a grave accident. My body is as frail as a human body, the difference being that it can regenerate itself, as happened with Jesus.’

‘But David, do you know the rough date when Jesus will be coming back?’

‘Yes, I know he will come down to earth some years after 2013. A disagreement between powerful nations will touch off the Third World War. In this war the dominion over the world will be at stake and it will be provoked by the one you know as Satan. After several years of war, and millions of deaths, Jesus will return to bring peace to the earth and to destroy his brother Satan, or to leave him to be annihilated in the catastrophes that will follow.’

‘His brother? You’re saying that Satan is Jesus’ brother?’

‘Exactly. Satan is Enlil, brother of Enki. It was he who exterminated a good part of mankind in the episode you know of as the destruction of Sodom and Gomorrah. After destroying a number of cities with seven nuclear bombs, he was exiled to another dimension, and he will return to earth in December of 2012, the end of the Mayan calendar. What you have seen in films about what will happen to the earth in December 2012 will not happen then, but many years later. December of 2012 marks the return of the antichrist to this dimension of planet Earth. And, hard as it may be to believe, people will adore him and he will easily rise to power.’

‘But why should the end of the Mayan calendar mark the return of Satan?’

‘In fact the Mayan calendar was previously called the Olmec calendar. It was made by one of Enki’s sons, who wanted to warn his people of the evil that was to come. The start of the Mayan calendar is the year of Enlil’s exile. The last year of it foresees the start of a new era: when Enlil’s exile is over and he returns to this dimension. No one knows how he will return, but return he will, and he will walk among humans as an equal. Another part of my mission is to alert people about this event, which is almost upon us.’

‘Well, this is a most amazing conversation, but we will have to take a break. We’ll be back in a minute with more revelations from David Griffin, the emissary of Jesus Christ.’

Everyone was appalled at David’s revelations. They were too many and too hard to take in for just one day. There were people who were horrified at what they had heard; and many others were laughing, skeptical about it all. The television channels worldwide were full of news of David. Now he had a great burden to bear. Thousands of people would follow him. Thousands of others would persecute him and speak ill of him. He would have to be ready for everything that might happen, and he would have to try to open the minds of the people to what was to come.

After Oprah’s program, not a day passed without David giving an interview to television, newspaper, magazine or radio. Every day his agenda was full. For two weeks he gave himself up solely to interviews, until he had been able to reveal almost everything. During this period he went to a laboratory to give blood for the DNA test which the Vatican had proposed. Thousands of skeptics throughout the world waited for the results of the test which could confirm they were right about David Griffin.

CHAPTER 35

Some weeks later

All the press was gathered in front of the DNA Diagnostic Center in Manhattan. There were hundreds of journalists, photographers and cameramen trying to find a space in front of the building where the official result of David Griffin’s DNA test would be announced, comparing it with the DNA that the Vatican alleged was Jesus Christ’s. Apart from the journalists, the road was blocked by police, to prevent a surge of thousands of people who also wanted to know the result of the test at first hand, live. But only the press was allowed to be there. After a two-hour wait beyond the time scheduled for the Diagnostic Center’s announcement, Dr. Ellen House approached the stage that had been set up, full of microphones, to give the final result. She was wearing a white jacket and in her hand she carried a red envelope. The envelope was sealed, and she began to tear it open. The laboratory had employed a firm of auditors to witness the whole examination process and two men in suits and ties, employees of the auditing firm, followed Dr. House closely. Many US and foreign television channels were broadcasting the proceedings live. Dr. House took a piece of paper out of the red envelope. She took a step forwards to be nearer to the microphones, put on her glasses and slowly began to read the result.

‘In accordance with samples of DNA furnished to our team by the Vatican, in the presence of two auditors, and compared with the blood collected from Mr. David Griffin, we are pleased to announce that the result of the test was 99.999% compatibility, in other words, the DNA samples belong to the same person or to identical twin siblings.’

The journalists went ballistic and all of them started putting questions at the same time. Meanwhile, the people who were watching the news and who believed in David felt relieved and very happy at the result. Some unbelievers began to invent conspiracy theories and suchlike, yet others yielded to the truth and repented of the mistaken judgment they had made. Benjamin Uggae was watching the BBC in his office, in Switzerland, and was extremely annoyed at the result. Weeks earlier, when he had learnt that the two cardinals had proposed the DNA test, he almost had them both killed, but nothing further could be done: the Pope had taken the decision and no intervention on his part would have been able to stop the test in time. It had never occurred to him that the Vatican might possess the DNA of Jesus, or he himself would have stolen it. ‘There’s nothing more to be done. The boy won this round,’ thought Benjamin, accepting the fact that he had failed in discrediting David before the population of the world. ‘Now I have to concentrate on getting my master back, that’s the only way that I shall have eternal life.’ Benjamin now would have to concern himself with the preparations for December of 2012, and with the particle accelerator that would be used to open the gateway between the universe where Enlil was in exile and this one. The experiments with the accelerator had not been conclusive up till now. Benjamin’s job was to convince the most powerful nations in the world to invest in the largest particle accelerator ever known and to pursue the project, so that the instrument should be ready to operate at maximum thrust in December of 2012.

‘Doctor, is there a chance that the test is not 100% effective?’ asked a journalist.

‘As I said, the test is 99.999% precise. In other words, yes, there is a discrepancy of 0.001% between the two DNAs. However, three tests were done, with three different samples from the two donors, and they all gave the same result.’

‘Doctor, how secure is the testing procedure? Who can guarantee they were not switched?’ asked another journalist.

‘We engaged a firm of auditors who were present at all stages of the test. In addition we stepped up our own security. The samples did not remain unattended for a single minute, so I can confidently say that it’s impossible for any type of fraud to have been committed. Later on the firm that carried out the audit will make a copy of its report available to the press. Nor can we forget that the whole process was filmed and the films have been kept, and can be made available if there is any suspicion of fraud. Next question.’

‘Doctor, can you confirm that the DNA analyzed is not human DNA?’

‘This I cannot reveal, as we were contracted only to give an opinion as to whether the samples were or were not compatible. Next!’

‘Doctor, based on this result can you confirm that David Griffin is a clone of Jesus?’

‘All we did was analyze the DNA; it’s not for us to say who is a clone of whom. If I replied in the affirmative I would be saying that the DNA collected in the Vatican is in fact from Jesus Christ, but that is something I cannot confirm, as I have no way of saying whose DNA that is. All I can say is that the DNA in the possession of the Vatican is identical to Mr. David Griffin’s DNA.’

‘Do you think it’s really possible that David may be a clone?’

‘Cloning is perfectly possibly these days. Even at the time Mr. Griffin was born it was already possible. All I can say is that, if he is not a clone of the person whose genetic material was deposited on the Vatican’s artifact, then either he is that person’s twin brother or the person himself.’

‘Doctor, what could happen to Dr. Thomas Griffin, who was responsible for David’s cloning?’

‘That’s a question I can’t answer. But my own opinion is this: if in fact he created a human clone, he should win the Nobel Prize. I don’t think any punishment will be meted out, as the United States does not have any sort of law prohibiting the cloning of a being. Thank you all for your attention, my time is now up. Goodbye,’ said Dr. Ellen House, turning her back and heading towards the exit of the building.

A long time went by. David had created a sort of universal religion which accepted people from all over the world. He made no distinction between Jews, evangelicals, Catholics. The people could continue worshipping as their own religions taught and at the same time become members of the Arammu Order, whose name in Sumerian means “love”. Love was precisely what David was preaching throughout the world. Love of one’s neighbor, of animals, of nature. Human beings should love in order to become better people. This way mankind would be lifted on to a new level of greatness, and would finally evolve. Even though David accepted people of all religions, a good part of the members preferred to give up their old beliefs and instead follow only the teaching and principles proposed by Arammu. There were more than five hundred million faithful in the whole world. The Catholic Church had lost nearly forty percent of its followers. Several other Christian religions also lost thousands.

Arammu attracted more and more people, preaching love and revealing the truth about the gods of old and the future of mankind. Furthermore, within the Order the people were instructed always to help one another, whatever situation they were in. This created a great sense of family and brotherhood. People helped one another and nobody deceived anybody. Those who entered the Order were really prepared to change their lives and their principles. If a brother from the order in China visited the United States and had nowhere to stay, he would be easily accommodated in the house of another brother. If a brother was unemployed, he could find a job in another brother’s company. If a brother’s tire blew out on the highway, he could find help straight away, from another brother who was driving past. The synergy between members was enormous; and their only purpose was to carry the word of love to other people and to bring others into the Order, with the intention of helping to spread the knowledge and the philosophy it taught. Unlike the traditional churches, Arammu asked no one for money, but even so the members contributed because they knew that the order needed money to grow and to build temples where the brothers could meet. All the order’s books were open to the members via the internet. Every member had access to all the expenses, and none of the money was used improperly to enrich any particular person. In addition to the Christians who joined the order, thousands of Jews and Muslims, as well as people of other non-Christian religions, enrolled themselves in the philosophy of love. And the members joined together to perform charitable works. They took food to the hungry and medicines to places without access to them. The people identified themselves with the principles of the new order. If all the people on earth were to follow the principles of the members of Arammu, they would be ready to evolve.

At a time when David, through his order, was working to save people throughout the world, his enemies were working behind the scenes to bring Satan back. Time was short, but there was nothing else for David to do. The only thing that was in his power to do was to spread the knowledge to the people, so that when Satan appeared they would not believe in him. Time was passing and David knew that when the moment came the world would no longer be the same. Famine, disease and war were coming. But this had been foretold from the earliest times.

CHAPTER 36

New York, 20th December 2012

Maria was walking hurriedly, a cup of coffee in her hand, towards the building where she worked as a daily maid. That day, she was cleaning the apartment of the ex-governor of New York, George Griffin, in Manhattan. As George lived alone with his wife, and his faithful guardian, John, had died a year earlier, he had decided not to have any more servants. He had retired from politics, and a daily maid cleaned the house twice a week. That was enough, as the couple divided their time between the Manhattan top-floor apartment and their country house in Alaska. Maria hurried into the building, as she was late, and George, who was methodical as ever, didn’t like his staff arriving late. When the elevator stopped at the top floor and the door opened, giving a view of the inside of the living room, Maria could see there was a terrible mess. ‘My God, those damned kids spent the weekend here, look at the state of the place.’ Maria was referring to George’s great-grandchildren, who used to visit him with their parents at the weekends. As she walked down the corridor she saw that the mess was worse than usual. Everything was very quiet, which wasn’t usual, as George always had the television on to follow the news. As she slowly approached the living room she saw that some of the furniture was broken and that chairs were flung upside down. ‘My God, has there been a robbery?’ With every step she took, Maria got more worried. When she got to the middle of the living room, what she saw froze her to the spot. Instinctively she gave a cry which the downstairs neighbor could hear. The ex-governor was lying on the floor with blood all over his body. He was wearing a bath-robe and a pair of Bermuda shorts. The ninety-year-old’s face was disfigured, as if he had been beaten. Maria plucked up her courage and approached George, who was not making a sound. She put her ear to his heart and could not feel it beating. She ran out and called the police.

‘Hallo? For the love of God, send an ambulance. Mr. George is all hurt.’

‘Take it easy, lady. We’ve identified your address and a police car and an ambulance are on their way. Please, calm down and tell me exactly what happened.’

‘It’s Mr. George… I got here and found the house turned upside down. I think he’s dead!’

‘You’re saying that Mr. George Griffin is dead?’ The policeman on the line had checked the name of the owner of the apartment on his computer.

‘But it wasn’t me, I swear! I got here and he was like that,’ said Maria, afraid of being accused of being an illegal immigrant.

‘Easy, lady. The police are on their way. If you want to leave the crime scene, wait outside the apartment till they arrive.’

‘OK I’ll wait.’

The police arrived in less than five minutes. An officer confirmed that George was indeed dead. Seconds later a team of paramedics arrived and started the procedure to try to revive George. The basic procedure was unsuccessful and so the paramedics decided to leave the body where it was, until the arrival of the scene of crime experts. As they were dealing with an important person, the police informed the FBI, who arrived some minutes later and sealed off the area. The investigators started to collect evidence and items which might lead to clues.

As George had been beaten to death the chances of the attacker’s DNA being on his body were good. Charlotte Rowe was the FBI agent on the scene, and she reached down to take out an instrument which was inside a bag attached to her belt. The instrument was a DNA scanner, a novelty which only the FBI used. The scanner was capable of detecting types of DNA on a surface, and if there was more than one type, the percentage of difference between the two as well as whether the DNA was from blood, hair or skin. The apparatus was linked to the FBI central office via internet, and so the result as to who the DNA belonged to was shown instantly on a small liquid crystal screen. The agent scanned the ex-governor’s body carefully. When she finished, in a few seconds the apparatus gave the result:

Number of DNA samples = 2

DNA1 – George Griffin

DNA2 – David Griffin

When she saw David Griffin’s photo on the screen the agent was astonished.

‘My God, it’s not possible!’

Charlotte was a follower of David’s and she couldn’t believe that he could have battered his own great-grandfather to death. Just as she finished reading out the results on the scanner, the cell phone in her pocket rang.

‘Yes, boss.’

‘Is the scanning result correct?’ her superior asked, having seen the result in his office.

‘We’ve been testing the scanner for several months and it’s never gone wrong. I can do it again to confirm the result, if you like.’

‘Do that. When we get the result, if it’s confirmed, we’ll get a warrant for the arrest of the boy.’

‘But, sir, don’t you think we should investigate more thoroughly? There are other variables we can analyze.’

‘Agent Rowe, are you still in doubt about the result?’ replied the chief, while the agent was scanning George’s body once more. ‘Didn’t I tell you? Same result. How can you explain the boy’s blood on the victim’s body? I’m going to get a warrant and when I have it I’ll let you know. In the meantime try and collect more evidence.’

‘Yes, sir. I’ll await your call.’

An hour later, several armed police officers surrounded the building where David Griffin lived with his grandfather Thomas. While the policemen closed the exits, FBI agents Rowe and Andersen went up the elevator together with two men in uniform. When they reached the floor they knocked at the door of the apartment without giving their names. A few seconds later David opened the apartment door.

‘Mr. David Griffin?’ asked Agent Rowe.

‘Yes, that’s me. How can I help you?’

‘You’re under arrest for the murder of George Griffin. Here is the warrant.’ The agent took David’s arm to handcuff him.

‘What? Murder? Of my great-grandfather? You’ve got to be joking,’ replied David, not understanding what was going on.

‘Your great-grandfather was found dead a little more than an hour ago, and guess whose DNA we found on his body?’

‘It’s impossible. I haven’t been out of the house today,’ answered David, starting to cry for the loss of his great-grandfather. ‘Please let me phone my grandfather.’

‘When we get to the FBI you’ll have the right to make a phone call. Now come with us. ‘

At the FBI headquarters in New York, agent Jeffrey Lee asked them to take the handcuffs off David, so that he could question him. David was miserable and downcast, not because of his imprisonment but because of his great-grandfather’s death. ‘Who would do a thing like that?’

‘Mr. Griffin, what have you got to tell me about George Griffin’s death?’

‘I don’t know anything. I haven’t left the house today. They didn’t even tell me how he was killed.’

‘Your great-grandfather was beaten to death and we found your blood on the victim’s body. When someone is attacked it’s usual for the attacker to leave traces of blood or hair,’ said the agent, looking at David’s hands. ‘But wait, there are no marks on your hand. How’s that possible?’

‘I told you, I’ve got nothing to do with this death. They’ve set me up. You’ve got to believe me. Please let me see my grandfather.’

‘Unfortunately I can’t.’

‘Agent Lee. Come here please.’ A sharp voice came through the loudspeaker in the interrogation room.

‘Agent Lee, in case you don’t know, this boy heals people. Don’t you think he’d have the power to heal himself? That’s why there are no marks of aggression on his hands. The wounds must have healed themselves.’

‘You’re right. I’d forgotten that detail.’

‘Go back in there. Hasn’t he asked to use the telephone?’

‘He only asked for his grandfather to be called, but we haven’t been able to locate him yet.’

‘And his lawyer?’

‘He has given up his right to have a lawyer present.’

‘Given up his right? The boy’s crazy. He’s in trouble up to his neck and he still doesn’t want a lawyer?’

David was interrogated for more than an hour. As the FBI didn’t get a confession out of him, he was taken to a slightly more comfortable cell, for they were dealing with a celebrity who had no prior record. The FBI continued its investigations. They were surprised at David’s attitude, the fact that he didn’t want a lawyer and also that they could find no motive for him to have killed his own great-grandfather. The whole story was very odd. The press had found out that David was in prison and in a few hours there were thousands of people outside the FBI building, with placards demanding David’s release. He knew this could only be the work of his enemies. ‘It’s too much of a coincidence for a set-up like this to be arranged just when the time is near for Satan to be released. Do they think I want to interfere in their plans?’ David lay down to rest a little and to think. ‘I hope they find Grandpa. I’ve got to get out of here and I’ve got to see great-grandpa.’

CHAPTER 37

Switzerland, CERN Laboratory, 21st December 2012

Benjamin Uggae and his son Adolf got together a team of physicists, scientists and other people they trusted who worked at CERN, the European Organization for Nuclear Research, in order to start up the Large Hadron Collider (LHC) in a discreet way, so that the press wouldn’t know. As Benjamin was one of the heads of the Bilderberg Club it wasn’t difficult for him to convince the political leaders of various countries, who were involved in the project to open the gateway to Enlil´s dimension, to authorize the utilization of the particle accelerator. Benjamin also convinced them to keep quiet about the test to be carried out right on the eve of the holiday season. He personally saw to it that all the people involved in the test were in some way linked to his order. At least thirty people, members of the thirteen families who made up the leadership of the Illuminati, were there to witness the great event which would bring Satan back to this dimension. With him there would come leaders of the alien race known on earth as the Greys, his companions in exile and the architects of the plan that had been designed to free them all. Also at CERN were three representatives of the Grey race who had taken human form. In fact what they did was to send a telepathic message to all those around them that they should perceive them as humans, but their appearance didn’t change. However the stratagem only worked in places where few people were gathered, otherwise too much telepathic energy would be required.

For many years Benjamin and all the Illuminati had been planning for this day. Billions of dollars had been invested, many wars and many deaths had occurred, for them to reach this level of technological evolution. Many hundred of years of investment and of alien intervention had been needed for mankind to be able to develop a machine which could open a gateway between two parallel dimensions, and bring back to the earthly dimension one of the most feared and hated beings of all the planet’s history. Satan, as Enlil was known, was ready to return to earth. It would be a day for much rejoicing among all the members of the Illuminati, for they knew that their efforts would be recognized and that Satan would reward them with the secret of eternal life, known to few races in the universe.

Enlil and the leaders of the Greys, while in exile, had built a machine which could absorb the neutrinos emitted by the solar maximum, concentrate them and then use the energy acquired to help open the gateway between the two dimensions. What they were about to do was based on the same principle as intergalactic travel, whereby a fold in the universe had to be created to permit a short cut between two points. Now with a little more energy they had succeeded in making a small black hole, three feet high and three feet across, linking two parallel dimensions. The calculations and the actions on both sides had to be exact and totally synchronized, or there would be a catastrophe. If anything went wrong, earth would be sucked into the black hole and totally destroyed, as had happened in similar experiments in other galaxies. Fortunately the Greys had mastered the technique, and the experiment had only taken so long because where they were, their leaders did not have either technology or energy sufficient to assist in the creation of the gateway. It had taken centuries of solar maxima to accumulate the energy they needed.

The objective was to use the particle accelerator to generate a charge of one hundred electrovolts through collisions of streams of protons. To reach this level of energy, the LHC could count on the help of a device created by the Greys, capable of storing energy from the neutrinos emitted by the sun and by the explosion of stars. This device was attached at several points along the seventeen-mile length of the Collider, and would reach its highest level of energy at exactly three p.m. on the 21st of December 2012. As soon as this level was reached, the Collider would be switched on – it could be switched on sooner, but in this case there would be a risk that the start-up energy would be insufficient.

The hands of the clock hanging on the control room wall showed five minutes past three. Benjamin and his son Adolf, who looked a good deal older than his father, stood waiting behind the chairs where the scientists in charge of the whole mission were sitting. In another room were those who had come to watch the opening of the gateway. A large digital counter showed the accumulated energy level, rising towards a hundred electrovolts. The counter was at ninety-five percent and began to increase by one percent every ten minutes. The neutrinos feeding the charger took an average of thirteen minutes to traverse the distance between the sun and the earth, but now they were arriving more quickly, in greater numbers and with much more power, as the planet was aligned with the centre of the Milky Way, and the increase was due to the great electromagnetic fields that this alignment brought about. In about forty minutes’ time the alignment would be total, and they would use the centre of the galaxy to synchronize their task in both dimensions. The phenomenon would occur in both at exactly the same instant, which allowed for an almost perfect synchronization, subject to a margin of error of thousandths of a second.

Soon the digital counter showed one hundred percent energy accumulation. They were ready to switch on the great machine and open once for all the gateway they had so desired to create. A digital clock showed the countdown, and in two minutes the final stage would be activated, all the previous stages of the process now being operative and checked.

Benjamin insisted on placing his finger on the red button which would activate the final stage and open the gateway. Now the seconds passed like hours and they felt as if time had frozen. Uggae was in a cold sweat. When the final moment came Benjamin Uggae did not hesitate, but pressed the red button a single time. A noise like a thunderclap could be heard through the glass which separated the control room from the place where the gateway would open. Then the Collider began to make a noise which sounded like a symphony to the ears of the watchers. On big LCD screens they could see what was happening throughout the seventeen miles of the tunnel. Hundreds of people were working all along its length at that moment, ignorant of what was

really happening.

In a few seconds, when the great machine reached 98 electrovolts, a white light began to form. It had first appeared with a width of a few inches and now had grown to nearly three feet. Suddenly it was sucked into a black ball which had formed inside it. The black ball began to get larger and in turn reached a width of three feet. The scientist drew back in alarm when they saw that small grey beings, with thin bodies and big heads, were exiting one by one from inside the black hole. A total of thirteen beings crossed the hole and, at the last, bending down to let his seven-foot-tall body pass through, came a man in black clothing, with hair and beard white as snow down to his waist. In the control room the energy counter started falling rapidly. The hole was closing and in a few seconds it had disappeared altogether.

There was a great commotion among the spectators in the next room. They had been seated but were now all on their feet, trying to see who had come through the black hole. Benjamin Uggae could not contain his emotion. His body started trembling and he had to sit down to recover. Soon all the invited guests had invaded the control room to have a better look, through the thick glass windows, at the beings who had just entered this dimension. And so Satan had returned, on the 21st of December 2012, at precisely six minutes past six in the afternoon. Enlil now looked like a man of seventy. He cast his eyes around him, excited at what had happened.

‘My friends, we have succeeded in returning to our dimension. Congratulations to you. Without you we could not have done it,’ said Enlil to the Greys, who were not showing any kind of emotion at the feat. Hardly had he finished thanking them when a great reinforced door behind him began to open.

The door opened fully and Benjamin and his son entered, together with the scientists and another thirty people or so. As soon as they saw Enlil they fell to the ground on their knees, as a sign of reverence and submission to their master on his return.

‘Hail, Enlil, great lord of planet Earth.’

‘Please get up, my brothers. Thanks to you I am back in my own dimension. You have no idea what I went through in that accursed exile. My thirst for vengeance is greater than this world,’ said Enlil, taking Benjamin by the shoulders and pulling him up.

‘My Lord, I am Benjamin Uggae, your grandson. I was created to serve you.’

‘Ah, yes, you must be the son of Nergal and an earthling woman. I have heard much about you. You lead our group on earth when my son is on Nibiru.’

‘Yes, Lord Master, I am Nergal’s son. Allow me to present my son Adolf.’

‘Adolf… my great-grandson. Of course I remember. I watched your steps often and Nergal spoke much about you, the famous Adolf Hitler. My congratulations on your accomplishments. You did an excellent job.’

‘Thank you, Master.’

‘I thought you had died. How did you manage to deceive the humans?’ asked Enlil, who was familiar with human history but did not have detailed knowledge of all his followers.

‘I had a double. All we had to do was to fake my suicide and they believed I had died. Today I am nearly 124 years old and I can walk normally among the humans without being recognized.’

‘Adolf and Benjamin, for your deeds I shall grant you eternal life. I know that is what above all you wished for.’

‘No more than for your freedom, Master.’

‘I am thirsty. Can you give me some clean water? I have not seen clean water for thousands of years.’

The leaders of the thirteen families and Adolf went into a great chamber that was reserved for Enlil and where they would have a meeting. The fifteen of them settled into large, comfortable armchairs which had been placed there for the purpose.

‘Master, would you not like to rest? Your house is nearby,’ said Benjamin, concerned for Enlil.

‘My dear grandson, I have spent more than three thousand earth years with nothing to do except wait for this day; do you really think I am tired? What I am tired of is waiting. I want to know about my damned brother.’

‘Enki is in Nibiru but, as you already know, a clone of his is traveling round the world, preparing the humans for his return, which is when he says you will be destroyed.’

Enlil laughed. ‘My brother was always a great dreamer. He has no idea what awaits him. He and my damned father left me in that accursed place to rot. Soon I shall have my revenge. Where is that damned clone? Just as well he didn’t upset our plans.’

‘We managed to get him arrested. We killed one of his human family and incriminated him with the authorities. That’s why he gave us no trouble. But I should warn you that he possesses Enki’s powers.’

‘I see. But it won’t help Enki to have perfected his body genetically. These accursed humans, the worst plague ever to exist and which still ravages this beautiful planet, always were and always will be Enki’s weakness. We are not the wicked ones; all we want to do is to wipe this plague, the human race, off the face of the earth. The humans are ruining this place, destroying and consuming all its natural resources, and then they say we are the bad ones.’

‘We agree with you. The humans have spread to every corner of the planet. In a few years there’ll be nothing left of it, they will have destroyed everything.’

‘You already know part of my plan to take over the planet. I am hoping to be able to control it in a short space of time. I believe you have prepared everything for my arrival.’

‘Yes, sir. In a few years the European Union, which we created, will join with the United States and some other countries. They will form a single country and the others, which do not obey us, will be destroyed. But independently of this we control the UN, the European Union and some other nations. It remains for us to take full control of the United States, which we dominate only partly, but we lack only some sectors of the economy. But now that you are here, what about becoming president of the United States of America? If that happens we can form a coalition with the European Union and then the whole world will be ours.’

‘I thought of putting someone in my place in that role, but as I know that nobody will do anything right, I myself should become president. I hope Jesus doesn’t appear and stand in my way, or we’ll have to have a war with him. How is our army?’

‘Sir, we have more than three hundred battalions awaiting your orders. Apart from that we have the Greys and the Reptilians on our side. I would dare to say we are invincible.’

‘Good. But we can’t make the first move, or the damned Intergalactic Confederation will stick its nose in. We have to wait for them to attack us. My plan is to take power with the consent of the humans themselves. If that happens, not even the Confederation will be able to stop me governing; they will have to lump it, and then I shall have my revenge. The next thing after that will be to take power in Nibiru and then I will leave this planet to you and my sons. My brother Enki, who now calls himself Jesus, and my father Anu, I want to keep alive until the end to see my triumph. After that we’ll send them into exile, so that they can enjoy what I have suffered all these years. One more thing: what sort of reputation do I have on earth now? You ought to know. I have only had a few short summaries from my son, from time to time. Am I still unpopular around here?’

‘As you know, Sir, here they call you Satan. Lucifer. The Devil. Fortunately the humans don’t understand what they say, and only repeat what they hear, like parrots. In any case we have a new identity for you and, with your charisma, you’ll get to be president of the United States in a few years.’

‘And this clone of Jesus who’s on earth, can’t he upset our plans?’

‘From what we can gather from his preaching, he knows it is inevitable that you will rise to power. His plan is to make people more virtuous, so that they can be saved by Jesus. He seems to be arranging a fleet of ships to take people off the planet. I think he is here only to prepare the way, not to get into a war with you.’

‘But he will know who I am and can tell the humans about me. If that happens I won’t be able to win the election.’

‘Perhaps. Not all the humans believe in him. A lot of them take him for a false prophet. We can try to discredit him, and say he is the antichrist. Nor can he prove anything. It’ll be his word against yours.’

‘Understood. Now take me around the world. I want to see with my own eyes how everything is looking. After that you can take me to my new home. Ah! Arrange some beautiful women too. I think twenty should do. I’ve spent more than three thousand years without seeing a female.’

‘That’s already been taken care of, Sir. Tomorrow we’ll give a party at your mansion to celebrate your return.’

‘Perfect. Then let’s go. My dear humans, your great God is back,’ said Enlil in a loud voice; and then he let out a great guffaw of joy.

Enlil, who was now Satan, had been seen as the only god for centuries before the birth of Christ. The passages in the Old Testament which speak of a vengeful and bad-tempered God are reflections of how Enlil acted in those days, contrasting with the era of Enki who was seen in the New Testament as a kind and forgiving God. Satan was back on earth with the promise of vengeance on his brother Jesus and his father Anu, as well as on all mankind, who he had always thought of as a plague that should never have been created. A new era had just begun. The world would witness the worst time in its history. The end of time was near. Armageddon was just beginning.

EPILOGUE

Jerusalem, 24th December 2013, 11.06 p.m.

Billions of people around the world were getting ready for the most important night of the year for Christians: Christmas. In Jerusalem it was no different. Many of the inhabitants of the city were already gathered with their families for the long-awaited supper to be followed by an exchange of presents, as was the tradition among Christians and even among some Jews, who been won over by the importance of this date. The moon was shining in the sky as never before. It should by now have started to wane, but strangely it still looked like the full moon of the night before.

Many people were out of doors admiring the beautiful satellite shining in the sky when, unexpectedly, a black band started to cover it. It was like an eclipse, except that the band advanced much more quickly than any eclipse ever seen. People were always fascinated with the beauty of the moon, and so they were curious about what was happening. In a few minutes the moon was almost completely covered, with just a small part of the edge of it still shining. Seconds later it had totally disappeared. At that moment the part of the world’s population that could see the phenomenon went out of doors to see what had happened. Nobody could understand it. And then a great shadow appeared in the sky and hid many of the stars. Minutes later, television channels started to cover the strange phenomenon. They did so with difficulty, as all the world’s communication facilities were starting to fail and interference started in their transmissions.

In Jerusalem the sky got darker and darker as the seconds went by. Grey clouds covered the city and much of the sky. To the watchers’ surprise the beautiful starry night now gave way to great clouds which swirled about in a manner never seen before. Lightning started to flash from all directions, followed by deafening thunderclaps. The noise went on for some time. When the thunder and lightning abated, thousands of multi-colored lights lit up the sky. From the city of Jerusalem and as far as the phenomenon could be seen, all the sky was covered by clouds and multi-colored lights, which slowly descended in formation. Billions of people were witnessing an event unprecedented in the history of mankind.

Suddenly the clouds started to disperse and there could be seen a huge metallic object in the sky with thousands of lights around it. The thing had a diameter of more than three hundred miles. When they realized that it was a vast spaceship millions of human beings began to panic. Desperate crowds rushed along city streets, huge numbers of others locked themselves in their homes and put out the lights, trying to hide from that colossal ship.

Minutes later the ship began to slow down and came to a complete stop, several miles above sea level, in a place where it could be seen from many parts of earth. Most of the countries on the planet had immediately placed their armed forces on alert. Some of them, seeing the ship motionless, sent planes and helicopters to try and get a closer glimpse of that giant from another world. As well as the planes, ground-to-air missiles were trained on the huge object, which so far appeared peaceful.

The military and heads of state were even more frightened than the rest of the population. Government leaders fled to secret hiding-places, fearful that the aliens might initiate an attack on strategic targets in their countries. The media talked of nothing else, in spite of serious interference in their transmissions. Minutes had passed and now what only had been seen before in films had become reality. The ship was stationary and the lights began to shine more brightly. The central light was immediately over the city of Jerusalem. As nothing happened, people began to calm down and those who had locked themselves in their houses began to come out to watch the historic phenomenon – in spite of the military’s urging for them to stay indoors. Suddenly all the television and radio stations went off the air. Every television screen in the world went white, whatever channel it was tuned to. On the radio, only a hissing sound was heard.

Then an image of the shadow of a man arose unexpectedly and wavered on the television screens. For a minute the image came and went, like a badly-tuned channel. Abruptly images of wars leapt on to the screens of all the sets – many of the images were real and had previously been shown. It was a show: every three seconds a different war (even the ancient ones, which modern man could not have recorded) appeared on the screens. In all there were ten minutes of images of hundreds of wars, of destruction, of killing of people and animals, and other indescribable things. At the end the television screens went a bright white again. A small dot appeared and slowly grew, until it became a man walking towards the viewers. Soon it was possible to see his whole body clearly. It was an ordinary man, but beautiful; he was wearing white clothing; his eyes and his hair were light brown – his hair wavy and down to his shoulders; he had a carefully trimmed beard. The screens panned in on his eyes. People watching were practically hypnotized. Earlier they had all been watching the great ship, and then the scenes of war and horror, and now the eyes of all mankind were focused on the television screens. Clearly the ship had taken over all the world’s communication media.

The man had a serene look and he started to talk quietly and, to everyone’s surprise, in all languages. It was the same man and the same scene, apparently live, but different languages were spoken at the same time.

‘Greetings, my dear children. Do not be afraid because, as I promised you, I have returned to this planet. I am Jesus Christ and I am back among you after hundreds of years.’

Millions of people the world over broke down in tears, desperate with emotion, and fell down on their knees before their television sets. The military were incredulous. A large number of the skeptics and atheists in the world began to repent. Non-Christians couldn’t believe their eyes. The world was awash in tears of emotion.

‘I come before you on this very special day for mankind and I know that many of you are in doubt about who I really am. Take your time, for soon you will know the whole truth and will be absolutely certain, and soon I will be on earth with you. I would like you to listen carefully. I have had to return before the allotted hour, for I see that you are almost destroying the earth and destroying yourselves as well. I was to return later but I had no choice. What I have just shown you are actual scenes of all the wars you have fought over the centuries, mixed in with real images made by yourselves. I confess that I am very disappointed with mankind and there came a moment in my life when I almost gave up my plans to return to this planet. But my love for you spoke more loudly, and in any case I could not abandon those who throughout their lives have been good in themselves and towards others, towards nature and the animals. Soon the earth will suffer great tribulations. A great fleet of ships like this one is on its way to save all the animals and all the people deserving of salvation. Do not be worried if you do not believe in me, for if you are a good person you too will be saved. I hope that by now you no longer doubt my existence. I will remain among you for some years, as I need to complete one of my missions – to pass on knowledge and teachings, which I began to do centuries ago on my first visit to this planet. I will stay among you for some years if you accept me. When the ships arrive, the chosen ones will be taken to my planet of origin and will receive the gift of eternal life. Those who have not lived a good life will remain on earth and will be destroyed, not by me, but by the natural disasters which are to come. I cannot prevent these disasters, which take place from time to time on this beautiful planet. I ask the leaders of the world to permit me and my brothers to descend to earth in a few days. Before my first parting I asked my apostles to warn all of you against false prophets who would come in my name. Some of you heard my words, but many of you preferred not to follow my teachings. A false prophet is among you now, saying that he was sent by me and that he shares my blood. I trust that you will not believe in this fraudster, even though he may be physically identical to me. I am here, and in truth I tell you, I will never send anyone in my name, for only I may come in the name of my father, who awaits us on my planet. Thank you for listening to me. Enjoy your holy supper, which has been prepared with such love. In a few days I will contact you again. Merry Christmas, my children. I am happy to be back.’

REFERENCES

Books / Audiobooks / e-Books

• Holy Bible - New Testament King James Version

• Holy Bible - Old Testament

• Texts and Apocrypha

• Bloodline of the Holy Grail - Laurence Gardner

• Holy Blood, Holy Grail - Richard Leigh, Henry Lincoln, Michael Baigent

• The True Story of the Bilderberg Group - Daniel Estulin

• Fingerprints of the Gods - Graham Hancock

• The Secret Doctrines of Jesus - H. Spencer Lewis

• The Hidden History of the Human Race - Michael A. Cremo and Richard L. Thompson

• The Lost Book of Enki - Zecharia Sitchin

• 12th Planet - Zecharia Sitchin

• The Stairway to Heaven - Zecharia Sitchin

• War of Gods and Men - Zecharia Sitchin

• Genesis Revisited - Zecharia Sitchin

• The Lost Realms - Zecharia Sitchin

• The Beginning of Time - Zecharia Sitchin

• Divine Encounters - Zecharia Sitchin

• The Cosmic Code - Zecharia Sitchin

• The end of the day - Zecharia Sitchin

• The true story of humanity and its possibilities - Rosa DeSouza

• Apocalypse 2012: An Investigation into Civilization’s End - Lawrence E. Joseph

• Chariots of the Gods? - Erich von Däniken

• Gods from Outer Space - Erich von Däniken

• The Gold of the Gods - Erich von Däniken

• In Search of Ancient Gods – Erich von Däniken

• Miracles of the Gods - Erich von Däniken

• According to the Evidence - Erich von Däniken

• Signs of the Gods? - Erich von Däniken

• Pathways to the Gods - Erich von Däniken

• The Gods and Their Grand Design - Erich von Däniken

• The Eyes of the Sphinx - Erich von Däniken

• The Return of the Gods - Erich von Däniken

• Odyssey of the Gods – An Alien History of Ancient Greece - Erich von Däniken

• The Gods Were Astronauts - Erich von Däniken

• Jesus, Interrupted - Bart D. Ehrman

• Gods & Heroes of Ancient Sumer - Katie Kubesh & Kimm Belloto

• History Begins At Sumer - Samuel N. Kramer

• Sumer: Cities Of Eden - Time Life

• Sumer and The Sumerians - Harriet Crawford

• The Family of Jesus disappeared - Tobias Churton

• Jesus: A Life Full - Juanribe Pagliarin

• Jesus lived in India - Holger Kersten

• From Sumer to Jerusalem - John Sasson

• The Sumerian - Samuel Noah Kramer

• Sumerian Mythology - Samuel Noah Kramer

• The Robots Rebellion - David Icke

• The Biggest Secret - David Icke

• Children of the Matrix - David Icke

• Human Race Get off your Kness - David Icke

• Crossfire: The Plot That Killed Kennedy - Jim Marrs

• Rule by Secrecy - Jim Marrs

• Alien Agenda - Jim Marrs

• The Terror Conspiracy - Jim Marrs

• The Rise of the Fourth Reich - Jim Marrs

Documentaries / Videos

• Unmasking the 9 / 11 Conspiracies - Jim Marrs

• 9 / 11 and the War on Terror - Jim Marrs

• UFOs and the New World Order - Jim Marrs

• Future Technology From the Past - Jim Marrs

• Probe - Jim Marrs

• Clash of the Gods - History Channel

• The Exodus Decoded - History Channel

• The Seven Wonders of Antiquity - History Channel

• How did our planet, History Channel

• God vs. Satan: The Final Battle - History Channel

• Beyond the Da Vinci Code - History Channel

• Aliens of the Past - History Channel

• Building an Empire: The Maya - History Channel

• 102 minutes that changed the world - History Channel

• Nostradamus: 2012 - History Channel

• The Crusades - History Channel

• The Seven Signs of the Apocalypse - History Channel

• 2012: The day of doom - History Channel

• Banned from the Bible: The Secret of the Apostles - History Channel

• Majestic 12: UFO Hiding - History Channel

• UFOs in the Depths - History Channel

• The Pacific Bermuda Triangle - History Channel

• The Bible Code - History Channel

• The Machine of the World’s End - History Channel

• Al Qaeda - History Channel

• Eyewitness to Jesus - Discovery Channel

• Chariots of the Gods? - Erich von Daniken

• UFO Hunters - The History Channel

• UFO Files - History Channel

Contact the Author

LeoMark@JesusET.com.br

Website

www.JesusTheExtraterrestrial.com

Follow the author

@_leomark

Table of Content

Title Page

Catalographic Sheet

Author’s Note

Relevant Fact

Religious fanatics, theologians and pseudo-theologians please note

Prologue

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Chapter 3

Chapter 4

Chapter 5

Chapter 6

Chapter 7

Chapter 8

Chapter 9

Chapter 10

Chapter 11

Chapter 12

Chapter 13

Chapter 14

Chapter 15

Chapter 16

Chapter 17

Chapter 18

Chapter 19

Chapter 20

Chapter 21

Chapter 22

Chapter 23

Chapter 24

Chapter 25

Chapter 26

Chapter 27

Chapter 28

Chapter 29

Chapter 30

Chapter 31

Chapter 32

Chapter 33

Chapter 34

Chapter 35

Chapter 36

Chapter 37

Epilogue

References

Contact